L9 BSM 2294853 14 00 PDF [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE Healthcare

1/18/10 GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM

LOGIQ™ 9 Basic Service Manual

Part Number: 2294853-100 Revision: 14

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Important Precautions

WARNING (EN)

AVERTISSEMENT (FR)

WARNUNG (DE)

• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. • IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. • FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. • CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS. • SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. • NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS. • LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES. • DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. • FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. • WARTEN SIE DIESES GERÄT NUR, WENN SIE DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN ANWWEISUNGEN IM KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH GELESEN HABEN UND NACHVOLLZIEHEN KÖNNEN. • WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

i

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

AVISO (ES)

ATENÇÃO (PT)

AVVERTENZA (IT)

HOIATUS (ET)

ii

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS. • SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, LA TRADUCCIÓN ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE. • NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. • LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA. • ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS. • SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO. • NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA. • O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS. • IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. • SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. • SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. • NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI. • KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES. • KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST. • ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST. • KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA, OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.

-

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

VAROITUS (FI)

VIÐVÖRUN (IS)

• ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU. • EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU. • REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK. • EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS, VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU.

iii

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

ADVARSEL (DA)

WAARSCHUWING (NL)

iv

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

• DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK. • HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE. • FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET. • MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN. • DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR. • ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN. • PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS. • INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.

-

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

ADVARSEL (NO)

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

• DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK. • HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE. • IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT. • MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.

OSTRZEŻENIE (PL)

v

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

VARNING (SV)

vi

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

• DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA. • OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER. • FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN. • OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.

-

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

(JA)

(ZH-CN)

(KO)

vii

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to: Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA. GE Healthcare employees should use TRACKWISE to report all documentation errors or omissions.

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS DANGER

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

WARNING

Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury. For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section of the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic Service Manual (2294853-100).

viii

-

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

LEGAL NOTES The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE Healthcare. GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.

TRADEMARKS All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.

COPYRIGHTS All Material Copyright© 2002-2010 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved

ix

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

10/12/10 PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Revision History

Revision

Date (YYYY/MM/DD)

Reason for change

0

2002/04/08

Initial Release

1

2002/11/08

Update for BT’02 Release, BEP and FEP changes

2

2003/04/04

Update for R2.1.1 Release and hardware changes

3

2003/10/23

Update for R3.0 Release and hardware changes

4

2004/09/15

Update for R4.0 Release, BEP3, 4D option, CW option

5

2004/11/13

Update for R4.1.0

6

2005/10/25

M3 Update for R6.x release, Added Legal Page, Cover Revision, Flat Monitor, TD Board changes

7

2005/11/21

Update for R6.0.5O.

8

2006/07/25

Update for R7.x release. Added DVR, hardware changes. Release for MS

9

2006/08/01

Update for R7.x release. Release for M3

10

2006/09/06

Update for R7.x release.

11

2007/12/04

Update for R7.x, branding cover updates, additional precaution languages, 19” LCD, BEP4.x, FRU numbers, R7.x baseload instructions.

12

2009/05/27

Update for R9.x

13

2010/01/15

Update for IE6 60601-1-6

14

2010/10/12

Updated for removal of CE Mark

List of Effected Pages(LOEP) Pages

Revision

Title Page

N/A

Important Precautions pages i to iv Rev History/LOEP pages v to x Table of Contents pages ix to xxxiii Chapter 1 - Introduction pages 1-1 to 1-24

14

14

14

Pages Chapter 2 - Site Preparation pages 2-1 to 2-10 Chapter 3 - System Setup pages 3-1 to 3-26 Chapter 4 - Functional Checks pages 4-1 to 4-28 Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory)

Revision

Pages

Revision

14

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/ Troubleshooting

14

pages 7-1 to 7-34 14

Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments pages 6-1 to 6-18

14

14

14

Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts pages 9-1 to 9-72 Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance pages 10-1 to 10-30 Index pages I to IV Back Cover

x

-

14

pages 8-1 to 8-98

pages 5-1 to 5-98 14

Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures

14

14

14 N/A

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 Introduction Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Service Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 Contents in this Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4 Overview of the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4 History - Hardware/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 History - Peripherals/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 History - Supported Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 How to Turn the Scanner On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options 1 - 7 Product Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Precaution Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1-9 1 - 10 1 - 11

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 17 1 - 17 1 - 18

Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18

xi

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22 What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22 Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23 Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23 System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24

xii

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 2 Site Preparation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Stability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-5

Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Networking Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner Connected to Hospital’s Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InSite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9

Table of Contents

xiii

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 3 System Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Average Set Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Set Up Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Operator I/O Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4 Preparing for Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 Rating Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6 ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Video Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Completing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9 Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10 Transducer Connection and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 Console Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 Acoustic Noise Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12 External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13 External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15 Other I/O Ports (Front of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17 Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20 xiv

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21 Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21 Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22 Before Starting a Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23 Loading Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23 Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23 System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23 Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Set Up (R4.x and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Set Up (R2.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software . . . . . . . . .

3 - 24 3 - 24 3 - 24 3 - 24

Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25 Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25 User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26

Table of Contents

xv

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5 Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6 To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6 To Boot Up Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7 Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 To Place System in Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9 To Power Off Back-End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9 To Shut Down Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10 Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 To Connect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 To Activate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 To Deactivate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 To Disconnect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11 Using CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Activate CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Omit Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Restore Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Start Frame/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13 System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14 System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15 Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16 To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16 To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16 Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17 Report Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17 The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18 xvi

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

For BT03 and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For BT04 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . .

4 - 18 4 - 19 4 - 21 4 - 22 4 - 22

Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23 Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24 Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brakes and Direction Locks Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents

4 - 25 4 - 25 4 - 26 4 - 27 4 - 28 4 - 28

xvii

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5 Dataflow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6 Front End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) . . . . 5 - 8 FEPS3.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8 Front End Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 Top Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9 RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board (Radio Frequency Amplifier Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10 TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11 Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13 SCB, SCB2 High Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Scan Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18 EBM, EBM2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19 EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20 B–Mode Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 M–Mode Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 Back End Processor (BEP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22 Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 PCIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 PCI Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24 Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24 xviii

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs (BEP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 24 5 - 25 5 - 25 5 - 25 5 - 25 5 - 25 5 - 26

Back End Processor (BEP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCIO Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002) . . . . . . Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup (RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 27 5 - 28 5 - 28 5 - 28 5 - 28 5 - 28 5 - 29 5 - 29 5 - 29 5 - 29 5 - 29 5 - 30 5 - 31 5 - 31 5 - 31 5 - 31 5 - 32

Back End Processor (BEP 3.x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs (BEP 3.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 34 5 - 35 5 - 35 5 - 35 5 - 35 5 - 35 5 - 36 5 - 36 5 - 37 5 - 37 5 - 37 5 - 37 5 - 37 5 - 38

Table of Contents

5 - 32 5 - 33

xix

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39 Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40 Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41 Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41 Inputs (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43 BEP Power On Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44 BEP Power Off Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45 Operator Console Control PWA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46 Console Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48 Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) . . 5 - 52 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54 Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55 Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Video Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Audio Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60 Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61 DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61 AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61 Connectors – Solder Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61 Interface Connectors – Component Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62 xx

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64 External I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 65 5 - 65 5 - 65 5 - 66 5 - 67

Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68 Modem and USB Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 69 5 - 69 5 - 69 5 - 69 5 - 69 5 - 69 5 - 70

Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Controller Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 71 5 - 72 5 - 72 5 - 74

Mechanical Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels/Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 - 76 5 - 76 5 - 76 5 - 76 5 - 77 5 - 77 5 - 78

Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79 Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79 Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents

5 - 79 5 - 79 5 - 80 5 - 80 5 - 80 5 - 80 5 - 81 5 - 82 xxi

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86 Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86 Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86 Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89 Planned Maintenance (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90 4D Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91 Principle of Volume Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91 4D Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92 Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable . . . . . 5 - 92 USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94 Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95 Continuous Wave Doppler Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96 Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96 PCI CW Doppler PWA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97 Internal CW Doppler Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97 Probe Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97 Mu Metal Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97

xxii

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Adjustment (Standard only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visible Image Display Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Tilt (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7

Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-Release Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Release System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Release Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-9 6 - 10 6 - 10 6 - 10 6 - 11 6 - 12 6 - 12

Brake Arm Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Table of Contents

xxiii

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 Brake Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 Front Wheel Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 Front Brake Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16 Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16 Rear Wheel Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17 Rear Wheel Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17

xxiv

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 Service Safety Considerations

...................................... 7-2

Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collecting Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-6

Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check and Record the P4 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 - 13 7 - 13 7 - 14 7 - 15 7 - 16 7 - 17 7 - 17

Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18 Acquisition Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19 Diagnostic Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 21 Calibration Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23 I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Launching the Op Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trackball Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slidepots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Touchscreen Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 - 24 7 - 24 7 - 25 7 - 26 7 - 26 7 - 27 7 - 27 7 - 28 7 - 28 7 - 29

Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 - 30 7 - 30 7 - 30 7 - 30

Table of Contents

xxv

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31 Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31 Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33 Dicom Verify Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33 Hard Drive Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34

xxvi

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1 8-1 8-2 8-3

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-6

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-7 8-7 8-7 8-7 8-7 8-8 8-9

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5. . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 . . . . Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 10 8 - 10 8 - 10 8 - 10 8 - 10 8 - 12 8 - 12

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 13 8 - 13 8 - 13 8 - 13 8 - 13 8 - 16 8 - 16

Before Starting a Software Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 Table of Contents

xxvii

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Save Connectivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 DICOM TCPIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17 Image Management Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 Managing Patient Data and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 Patient Images and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 Preset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 Backup Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 EZBackup/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19 User-Defined Backup Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22 Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 To Prepare to Load Base Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44 Loading Application Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x . . . . . . 8 - 54 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56 Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56 Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60 Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61 Application Software Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61 Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64 System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65 To Complete the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65 VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65 DVR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65 Print Key Assignment and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66 Cycle System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67 Standby Operation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68 xxviii

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

To Place the System in the Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68 To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68 Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69 Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 70 8 - 70 8 - 70 8 - 70 8 - 71 8 - 71

Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release Lock Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release Lock Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 72 8 - 72 8 - 72 8 - 72 8 - 72 8 - 73

Gas Shock Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Tray Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Shock Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install the New Gas Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reassemble Z-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 74 8 - 74 8 - 74 8 - 74 8 - 75 8 - 76 8 - 76 8 - 78 8 - 81 8 - 83

Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wirecable Removal Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wirecable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wirecable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 86 8 - 86 8 - 86 8 - 86 8 - 88 8 - 90

Frog Leg Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 - 92 8 - 92 8 - 92 8 - 92 8 - 92 8 - 92 8 - 95

Table of Contents

xxix

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 9 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3 Console View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4 External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5 Additional Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9 Bumper Kit, Frogleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12 Operator Control Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13 Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14 Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16 CRT Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16 Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18 Operator Control Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20 Upper Op Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20 Lower Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22 Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24 Front End Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26 I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32 3-D Externals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34 Back End Processor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35 BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35 BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36 BEP 3.x / 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38 Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 41 Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44 xxx

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Peripheral Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 - 44 9 - 48 9 - 49 9 - 50

Power Distribution Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 61 Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 62 Voice Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 63 Voice Scan Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 65 4D Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 66 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 67 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 68 Customer Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 69 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 70

Table of Contents

xxxi

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 10 Care & Maintenance Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6 Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11 Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11 GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13 Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14 Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14 xxxii

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic procedure on Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter procedure using probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 - 15 10 - 15 10 - 16 10 - 17 10 - 17 10 - 17 10 - 18 10 - 19 10 - 19 10 - 20 10 - 21 10 - 21 10 - 21 10 - 23 10 - 23 10 - 25

When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 27 ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29

Table of Contents

xxxiii

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_TOC.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

xxxiv

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Table of Contents

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 1 Introduction Section 1-1 Overview 1-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 1 This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit.

Table 1-1

Contents in Chapter 1

Section

1-1-2

Description

Page Number

1-1

Overview

1-1

1-2

Service Manual Overview

1-2

1-3

Important Conventions

1-9

1-4

Safety Considerations

1-16

1-5

Labels Locations

1-18

1-6

Dangerous Procedure Warnings

1-18

1-7

Battery Safety

1-20

1-8

Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)

1-21

1-9

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

1-21

1-10

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1-22

1-11

Customer Assistance

1-23

Purpose of Service Manual This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ 9 Ultrasound Scanning System.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-2 Service Manual Overview 1-2-1

Contents in this Service Manual 1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings. 2.) Chapter 2 - Site Preparation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ 9. 3.) Chapter 3 - System Setup: Contains installation procedures. 4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance. 5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics. 6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to the LOGIQ™ 9. 7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the LOGIQ™ 9. 8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU). 9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ™ 9. 10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ™ 9.

1-2-2

1-2

Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual •

Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.)

•

Hospital’s Service Personnel

•

Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)

Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

1-2-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual Table 1-2

LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations Part Number

Description

2188900

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-4

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0

2188900-5

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0

2188900-6

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0

2351100

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2351100-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2351100-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2375600

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03

2375600-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03

2375600-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03

2404587

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

5150000

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06

5150000-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06

5150000-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06

5177000

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*

5177000-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*

5177000-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*

*BT09 is a software-only upgrade

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

1-2-4 1-2-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Product Description Overview of the Product LOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used. The system can be used for: -

B-Mode

-

M-Mode

-

Color Flow Mode (CFM)

-

Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps

-

PW Doppler with high PRF

-

B-Flow Mode

-

M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging

LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.

1-4

Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 1-2-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Overview of the Product (cont’d)

Name Plate

Monitor (CRT) Monitor Controls Op. Panel Upper Bezel Gel Warmer Touchscreen/Display TGC Slidepot Knobs Operator Console

Front Cover VCR

B/W Printer 3.5” MOD CD-ROM or DVD

Probe Connector

Backend Processor Chassis Swivel Lock

Front Bumper

Brake Release Figure 1-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 1-2-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Overview of the Product (cont’d)

17”LCD Monitor

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Gel Warmer

Touchscreen/Display TGC Slidepot Knobs

Subwoofer Knob (Do not adjust) Operator Console

VCR Front Cover

B/W Printer

Probe Connector CD-ROM or DVD Backend Processor Chassis Front Bumper

Swivel Lock Brake Release

Figure 1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with 17” LCD Option - Major Components

1-6

Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 1-2-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Overview of the Product (cont’d)

19” LCD Monitor Monitor Controls Name Plate Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Gel Warmer

TGC Slidepot Knobs Subwoofer Knob (Do not adjust)

Touchscreen/Display

Operator Console

Figure 1-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD 1-2-4-2

History - Hardware/Software versions The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-3

History - Peripherals/Software versions The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-4

FRUs for Back End Processor The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-5

History - Supported Probes The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.

1-2-4-6

How to Turn the Scanner On and Off Please refer to Chapter 4, section 4-2-2 "Power On / Boot Up" , for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner ON and to Chapter 4, section 4-2-4 "Power Off / Shutdown" for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner OFF.

1-2-4-7

How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options To verify hardware versions on the boards, refer to Section 9-11 "Front End Processor Assembly" Please refer to Section 4-3 "Software Configuration Checks" to check the software versions on local software on the boards. Please refer to Chapter 4 to check for installed options.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 1-2-4-8 NOTE:

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Product Manuals The LOGIQ™ 9 Unpacking Procedure is delivered on paper. See Section 9-23 "Customer Documentation" for customer documentation available for the product.

1-2-4-9

Purpose of Operator Manual(s) The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and also kept near the unit for quick reference.

1-8

Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-3 Important Conventions 1-3-1 1-3-1-1

Conventions Used in Book Model Designations This manual covers the LOGIQ™ 9 scanners.

1-3-1-2

Icons Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.

1-3-1-3

Safety Precaution Messages Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:

DANGER

DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.

WARNING

WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.

CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury

and property damage if instructions are ignored.

NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible

Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk. Example: Disk drive will crash. NOTE:

Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure. Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

1-3-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Standard Hazard Icons Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm.

Table 1-3

Standard Hazard Icons ELECTRICAL

MECHANICAL

RADIATION

LASER

HEAT

PINCH

LASER LIGHT Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.

Table 1-4

Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used

AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY

TAG AND LOCK OUT

WEAR EYE PROTECTION

TAG

&

LOCKOUT Signed

1-10

Date

Section 1-3 - Important Conventions

EYE PROTECTION

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

1-3-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Product Icons The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment.

Table 1-5

Product Icons

LABEL/SYMBOL

PURPOSE/MEANING

LOCATION

Identification and Rating Plate Manufacturer’s name and address.

Rear panel

Date of manufacture

Rating Plate

Serial Number

Rating Plate

Catalog Number

Rating Plate

Identification and Rating Plate

Type/Class Label

Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.

Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 87802-03 indicates B Type equipment having even more electrical isolation than standard Type B equipment because it is intended for intimate patient contact.

Equipment Type BF Applied Part (man in the box with paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5334.

Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 87802-05 indicates equipment having a high degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact.

Chapter 1 Introduction

Probe connectors PCG connector or Rear of Console

Probe

ECG connector Surgical probes

1-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

10/12/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 1-5 LABEL/SYMBOL

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Product Icons (Continued) PURPOSE/MEANING

LOCATION

Defibrillator-proof type of equipment.

At the ECG connector on front of system.

This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one person attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight of the unit.

On the console where easily seen during transport

"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user.

Various

Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.

Various

Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.

May appear on some probes

"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.

Various

"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the mains power switch.

Rear of system adjacent to mains switch

“CAUTION This unit weighs... Special care must be used to avoid..."

1-12

Section 1-3 - Important Conventions

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

10/12/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 1-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Product Icons (Continued)

LABEL/SYMBOL

PURPOSE/MEANING

LOCATION

"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position of the power switch. CAUTION This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply

Adjacent to On-Off Switch

"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch. "ON" Indicates the power on position of the power switch.

Front Panel Switch

CAUTION This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply

"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth (grounding) terminal.

Internal

"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.

Rear of console

This unit carries the CE mark. The LOGIQ™ 9 unit complies with regulatory requirements of the European Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices.

Rear of Console

It also complies with emission limits for a Group 1, Class B Medical Device as stated in EN 60601-1-2 (IEC 60601-1-2). NOTE: CE Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.

United States only Prescription Requirement label

Authorized European Representative address.

Rear Panel

Rear Panel

NOTE: EC REP Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

10/12/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 1-5 LABEL/SYMBOL

1-14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Product Icons (Continued) PURPOSE/MEANING

LOCATION

ETL Listing Mark Monogram

Rear Panel

GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory Country Clearance.

Rear Panel

This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

Rear Panel

No hazardous substance, above the maximum concentration value, is present. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE).

Rear Panel

Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “10” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

Probe

Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “20” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.

Rear Panel

Section 1-3 - Important Conventions

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

10/12/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 1-5 LABEL/SYMBOL

or

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Product Icons (Continued) PURPOSE/MEANING

LOCATION

This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display, contain mercury.)

Rear Panel

How to lower LCD prior to transport

Rear of the LCD monitor.

How to lock Operator Panel prior to transport

Rear of the LCD monitor.

DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object on the joint of the monitor or monitor arm to avoid injury when moving the monitor and monitor arm.

Rear of the LCD monitor.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-4 Safety Considerations 1-4-1

Introduction The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.

1-4-2

Human Safety Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ 9 Training are authorized to service the equipment.

1-4-3

1-16

Mechanical Safety

WARNING

Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest position. Verify that the front brake is locked and the scanner is unable to swivel. Verify that the rear brakes are in the locked position.

WARNING

Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage when not in use. DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.

WARNING

Never use a probe that has fallen to the floor. Even if it looks ok, it may be damaged.

WARNING

REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake.

WARNING

The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as much as possible before moving the system.

WARNING

While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any patient data, images, system setups to a MOD, CD, DVD or hardcopy before doing a software upgrade.

CAUTION

Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.

Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

1-4-3

Mechanical Safety (cont’d)

CAUTION

The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 171kg (376 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage. ALWAYS: Be sure the pathway is clear. Use slow, careful motions. Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).

CAUTION

Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.

CAUTION

To avoid injury when you move the LCD monitor and the monitor arm, do NOT put your finger, hand, or object on the joint of the monitor or the monitor arm.

CAUTION

Before you move or transport the system, make sure to lock the LCD monitor arm firmly and flip down the monitor to prevent damage to the system.

CAUTION

Do NOT grab the speakers to move the monitor and the monitor arm when adjusting the LCD. However, when you turn up the monitor from flip-down status, you can grab the upper corner of the monitor.

CAUTION

To avoid injury or damage to the monitor, make sure there is nothing within range of the LCD before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes people as well as things. Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.

NOTICE

NOTE:

1-4-4 1-4-4-1

Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle: •

Secure the unit in an upright position.

•

Lock the wheels (brake).

•

DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.

•

Place the probes in their carrying case.

•

Eject any Magneto Optical disk, CD or DVD from their drive.

Electrical Safety Safe Practices To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating. The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment. Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.

WARNING

IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.

WARNING

CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER. Chapter 1 Introduction

1-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 1-4-4-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Probes Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner: •

Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the: -

Housing

-

Cable strain relief

-

Lens

-

Seal

-

Connector pins

-

Locking mechanism

•

Do not use a damaged or defective probe.

•

Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.

Section 1-5 Labels Locations Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2, for the label locations.

Section 1-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

DANGER

1-18

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

WARNING

IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.

WARNING

EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.

WARNING

Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Equipment Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.

Section 1-5 - Labels Locations

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 1-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Dangerous Procedure Warnings (cont’d)

WARNING

When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/ when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.

WARNING

Ensure that the system is turned off and unplugged. To verify that the Front End Power Supply (FEPS) is in a zero energy state, wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.

WARNING

Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ™ 9 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.

WARNING

Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment.

WARNING

Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.

WARNING

Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.

WARNING

Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical MSDS.

WARNING

Do Not attempt to charge batteries other than the type included in the kit (NiMH). Standard alkaline batteries CANNOT be recharged. READ all safety precautions that come from the battery and battery charger manufacturers.

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-7 Battery Safety To avoid the risk of injury, follow the warning and cautions to make sure that the battery does not burst, ignite, or generate heat of fumes.

CAUTION

The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury. To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.

WARNING

CAUTION

•

The battery has a safety device. Do not disassemble or alter the battery.

•

Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is between 0° and 40° C (32° and 104° F).

•

Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal objects.

•

Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.

•

Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60° C (140° F). Keep it away from fire and other heat sources.

•

Do not charge the battery near a heat source, such as a fire or heater.

•

Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.

•

Do not drop packs from height as it may cause possible malfunction damage.

•

Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.

•

Do not use a damaged battery.

•

Do not solder a battery.

•

Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.

•

Do not contact PCM directly to prevent packs from ESD damage.

To avoid the battery bursting, igniting, or fumes from the battery causing equipment damage, observe the following precautions: • •

Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.

•

If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.

•

If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears abnormal during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it. If you have any questions about the battery, consult GE or your local representative.

•

Store the battery between -20° C (-4° F) and 60° C (140°F).

•

Use only GE recognized batteries.

•

In case of the long term (3 months or more) storage:

•

1-20

Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.

•

Store the battery in a temperature range of 10° C (50° F) and 30° C (86°F).

•

When charging for the first time after long-term storage, recover such packs to original performance by repeating several cycles of full charging and discharging.

When storing packs for more than 6 months, charge at least once per 6 month period to prevent leakage and deterioration in performance due to self-discharging. Section 1-7 - Battery Safety

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-8 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains plug. To apply Lockout/Tagout: 1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown. 2.) Shutdown the equipment. 3.) Isolate the equipment. 4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices. 5.) Control all stored and residual energy. 6.) Verify isolation. All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved. . NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9

TAG

&

LOCKOUT Signed

Date

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: 1. Turn off the breaker. 2. Unplug the system. 3. Maintain control of the system power plug. 4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

Section 1-9 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package. NOTE:

The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-10 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1-10-1

What is EMC? Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply.

1-10-2

Compliance The LOGIQ™ 9 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements. For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual.

NOTE:

1-10-3

1-22

For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention

WARNING

Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD precautions: 1. Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection point located on the Rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector). 2. Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.

WARNING

Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.

Section 1-10 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 1-11 Customer Assistance 1-11-1

Contact Information If this equipment does not work as indicated in this Service Manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below. Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to Milwaukee: 1.) System ID serial number. 2.) Software version. 3.) Date and time of occurrence. 4.) Sequence of events leading to issue. 5.) Is the issue repeatable? 6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application. 7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type. 8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.

NOTE:

Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

Table 1-6

Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance Location

Phone Number

USA

Service: On-site

1-800–437–1171

Service: Parts

1-800-558-2040

Applications Support

1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698

GE Healthcare Ultrasound Service Engineering 9900 Innovation Drive Wauwatosa, WI 53226 Canada

1-800-668-0732

Latin America

Europe GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KG

Service

1-800-321-7937

Applications Support

1-262-524-5698

Phone: +33 (0) 130-831-300 (General Imaging and Cardiac) +43 (0) 7682-3800-26 (Voluson-Logiqbook)

BeethovenstraBe 239 Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen

Fax:

+49 (0)2122-8024-31

Germany Asia (Singapore) GE Ultrasound Asia

Tel: +65 6291-8528

Service Department - Ultrasound 298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06 Central Plaza

Fax: +65 6291-7006

Singapore 169730 Japan Support Center

Phone: 81-426-48-2940 Fax: 81-426-48-2905

Chapter 1 Introduction

1-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER1.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

1-11-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

System Manufacturer Table 1-7

System Manufacturer Manufacturer

FAX Number

GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC 9900 Innovation Drive

414-721-3865

Wauwatosa, WI 53226 USA

1-24

Section 1-11 - Customer Assistance

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 2 Site Preparation Section 2-1 Overview 2-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 2 This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ 9. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit.

Table 2-1

Contents in Chapter 2

Section

Description

Page Number

2-1

Overview

2-1

2-2

General Console Requirements

2-2

2-3

Facility Needs

2-6

Chapter 2 Site Preparation

2-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2-1

Console Environmental Requirements Table 2-2

NOTE: 2-2-1-1

Environmental Requirements - LOGIQ™ 9

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Humidity

Heat Dissipation

10o to 35oC

-10° to 60° C

30 - 85% non-condensing

3500 BTU pr hour

Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = ((Degrees C * 9/5) + 32). Cooling The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ 9 is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.

2-2-1-2

Lighting Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.

2-2-2 NOTE:

Electrical Requirements GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

NOTE: 2-2-2-1

Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements Table 2-3

2-2-2-2

Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9

Voltage

Tolerances

Current

Frequency

100-120 VAC

±10%

9.5 A

50-60 Hz

200-240 VAC

±10%

4.75 A

50-60 Hz

Inrush Current Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies.

2-2

Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 2-2-2-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Site Circuit Breaker It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.

CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.

The LOGIQ™ 9 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit. 2-2-2-4

Site Power Outlets A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes.

2-2-2-5

Unit Power Plug If the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.

2-2-2-6

Power Stability Requirements Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms. Power Transients (All applications) Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

Chapter 2 Site Preparation

2-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

2-2-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

EMI Limitations Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The LOGIQ™ 9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed. Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These sources include: •

medical lasers,

•

scanners,

•

cauterizing guns,

•

computers,

•

monitors,

•

fans,

•

gel warmers,

•

microwave ovens,

•

light dimmers

•

portable phones.

The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference. See Table 2-4 for EMI Prevention tips.

Table 2-4

EMI Prevention/Abatement

EMI Rule

Details

Be aware of RF sources

Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.

Ground the unit

Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.

Replace all screws, RF gaskets, covers, cores

After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.

Replace broken RF gaskets

If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.

Do not place labels where RF gaskets touch metal

Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.

Use GE specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable and peripherals length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.

2-4

Take care with cellular phones

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.

Properly dress peripheral cables

Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the frame.

Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

2-2-4

Scan Probe Environmental Requirements Table 2-5

NOTE:

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Environmental Requirements - Probes Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Standard Probes

10o to 40o C

-10° to 60° C

4D Probes

18o to 40o C

-10o to 50 o C

Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).

NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES

OF -20 TO +50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.

2-2-5

Time and Manpower Requirements Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.

CAUTION The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed

monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage. ALWAYS: Be sure the pathway is clear. Use slow, careful motions. Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).

Chapter 2 Site Preparation

2-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 2-3 Facility Needs 2-3-1

Purchaser Responsibilities The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery. Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser responsibility includes:

NOTE:

•

Procuring the materials required.

•

Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.

•

Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.

All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment. The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase). The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.

2-6

Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

2-3-2 NOTE:

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Required Features GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.

NOTE:

NOTE:

2-3-3

Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. •

Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.

•

Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling

•

Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.

The LOGIQ™ 9 has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on-board peripherals. •

Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer

•

Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit

•

Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack)

•

Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)

Desirable Features •

Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide

•

Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible

•

Sink with hot and cold water

•

Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths

•

Emergency oxygen supply

•

Storage for linens and equipment

•

Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room

•

Dual level lighting (bright and dim)

•

Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals

Chapter 2 Site Preparation

2-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

2-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion

Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan

2-8

Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

2-3-5 2-3-5-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Networking Setup Requirements Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection) None.

2-3-5-2

Scanner Connected to Hospital’s Network Supported networks: DICOM Network (option)

2-3-5-3

Purpose of the DICOM Network Function DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.

2-3-5-4

DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements To configure the LOGIQ™ 9 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide some necessary information. Use the Connectivity Setup Worksheet on 3-22 to record the required information that must include:

2-3-5-5

•

A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ 9.

•

The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION.

•

The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the LOGIQ™ 9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors.

InSite Requirements •

Network 10/100 or 10/100/1G Interface.

•

Optional analog phone line for older products.

Chapter 2 Site Preparation

2-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER2.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL This page was intentionally left blank.

2-10

Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 3 System Setup Section 3-1 Overview 3-1-1

The Purpose of Chapter 3 This chapter contains information needed to unpack and set up the unit. Included are procedures to receive, unpack and configure the equipment. System operation is verified at the factory.

Table 3-1

Contents in Chapter 3

Section

Description

Page Number

3-1

Overview

3-1

3-2

Set Up Reminders

3-2

3-3

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

3-4

3-4

Preparing for Set Up

3-6

3-5

Completing the Setup

3-8

3-6

System Configuration

3-11

3-7

Available Probes

3-21

3-8

Software/Option Configuration

3-21

3-9

Connectivity Setup Worksheet

3-22

3-10

Before Starting a Software Upgrade

3-23

3-11

Loading Base Image Software

3-23

3-12

Loading Application Software

3-23

3-13

System Setup

3-23

3-14

Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color

3-24

3-15

Paperwork

3-25

3-16

Checks

3-26

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-2 Set Up Reminders 3-2-1

Average Set Up Time Table 3-2

Average Set Up Time Average Set

Description

3-2-2

Up Time

Comments

Unpacking the scanner

0.5 hours

Scanner wo/options

0.5 hours

Dependant on the required configuration

DICOM Option

0.5 - 2.0 hours

Dependant on the configuration amount

Set Up Warnings 1.) Since the LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) without options, two people are required to unpack it. Two people are also required for installing any additional items in excess of 16 kg (35 lbs). 2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, turn off the breaker, and unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting. 3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5°C increment its temperature is below 10°C or above 40°C.

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site

may cause the system to be damaged.

Table 3-3

Acclimation Time

°C

60

55

50

45

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

-5

-10

-15

-20

-25

-30

-35

-40

°F

140

131

122

113

104

96

86

77

68

59

50

41

32

23

14

5

-4

-13

-22

-31

-40

hrs

8

6

4

2

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

3-2-2-1 WARNING

3-2-2-2

Brake Pedal Operation

REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake. Operator I/O Panel Position If weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in its extended position, the console could tip over

WARNING

3-2

The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as much as possible before moving the system.

Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-2-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Safety Reminders

DANGER

WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT!

CAUTION

Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted.

CAUTION

If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment.

CAUTION

To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three- to two-prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.

CAUTION

Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present.

CAUTION

Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on-board peripherals do not cause the unit to draw more than 14.0 amps.

CAUTION

Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.

CAUTION

OPERATOR MANUAL(S) The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and kept near the unit for quick reference.

CAUTION

ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ 9 probe is within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.

Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment CAUTION Two people are needed to unpack the unit because of its weight.

Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted or pushed up or down a slope.

CAUTION Remember to use relevant Personal Protecting Equipment during packing/unpacking. Check

with your local EHS representative.

Table 3-4

Unpacking Procedure

Step

Task

1.

Open the four hinges on each door

2.

Remove the doors at both ends of the box

3.

Place the front door against the rear edge of the pallet. The front door can be used as a ramp.

Front Door used as ramp.

4.

3-4

Be sure to place the ramp (front door) as illustrated here.

Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanner’s keyboard and all the filling material, from the wooden box.

Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Unpacking Procedure (Continued)

Step 5.

Task Press once on the swivel lock to release the brake.

Swivel Lock

Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment. 6.

Carefully move the scanner out of the wooden box, down the ramp.

7.

Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit.

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

10/12/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-4 Preparing for Set Up 3-4-1

Verify Customer Order Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.

3-4-2 3-4-2-1

Physical Inspection System Voltage Settings Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ™ 9 Scanner are found on a label to the right of the Power switch and External I/O, on the rear of the system.

3-4-2-2 NOTE:

Rating Plate This Rating Plate example is a representation of several designs used.

GE Healthcare

LOGIQ 9

CISPR 11 GROUP 1 CLASS A

200 kg

Rating Plate

Figure 3-2 Rating Plate Example

3-6

Section 3-4 - Preparing for Set Up

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

10/12/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 3-4-2-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label This ETL label is required for all USA systems.

LOGIQ 9

GE Healthcare

ETL Label CISPR 11 GROUP 1 CLASS A

200 kg

Figure 3-3 ETL Label Example WARNING

3-4-2-4

CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.

Video Formats Check that the video format is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL.

3-4-3

EMI Protection This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-5 Completing the Setup 3-5-1

Power On / Boot Up

NOTE: 3-5-1-1

After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. Scanner Power On 1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system. 2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug. 3.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage. Never use an adapter that would circumvent the safety ground. 4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system. When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals and the Back-end Processor.

Cable Clip Circuit Breaker Mains Power Cable

Figure 3-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On

NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the On / Off switch on the Control panel (Figure 3-5) indicates

the Back End Processor is in standby mode: For BT03 systems and prior, the On / Off switch illuminates amber. For BT04 systems and later, the On / Off switch blinks amber and green.

3-8

Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 3-5-1-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Back-end Processor Boot Up 1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once. When the On / Off switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No status messages are displayed during this process.

On / Off switch

Figure 3-5 On / Off switch

3-5-2 NOTE: 3-5-2-1

Power Off / Shutdown After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. Back-end Processor Power Down 1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.

Figure 3-6 System Exit Menu

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 3-5-2-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Scanner Shutdown

Cable Clip Circuit Breaker Mains Power Cable

Figure 3-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On 1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the system. 2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner. NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the

uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system. NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file

corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.

3-5-3

Transducer Connection and Removal 1.) To connect a transducer to one of the three right-most transducer receptacles: a.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever is in the horizontal position. b.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface. c.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place. 2.) To disconnect a transducer from one of the three right-most transducer receptacles: a.) Turn the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position. b.) Separate the transducer connector from the receptacle mating surface.

NOTE:

3-10

It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.

Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-6 System Configuration 3-6-1 3-6-1-1

System Specifications Physical Dimensions The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit are summarized in Table 3-5 and Table 3-6. Table 3-1 lists the size of LOGIQ™ 9, with monitor and on-board peripherals. Table 3-5

Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ™ 9 Height

3-6-1-2

Minimum

Maximum

127 cm / 50 inches

160.7 cm / 63.25 inches

Depth

64 cm / 25.2 inches

89.9 cm / 35.4 inches

Console Weight Table 3-6

3-6-1-3

Width

Weight of LOGIQ™ 9 and Monitors, With and Without Peripherals

Model

With Peripherals - kg [lbs]

Without Peripherals - kg [lbs]

LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT

206 [454]

185 [408]

LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT, Upgraded to LCD (includes counterweight)

206 [454]

185 [408]

LOGIQ™ 9 with LCD

192 [423]

168 [370]

Acoustic Noise Output: Less than 70dB(A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2.

3-6-2

Electrical Specifications Table 3-7

Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9

Voltage

Tolerances

Current

Frequency

100-120 VAC

±10%

9.5 A

50-60 Hz

200-240 VAC

±10%

4.75 A

50-60 Hz

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-6-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

On-Board Optional Peripherals Table 3-8

Approved On-Board Peripherals

Device

Manufacturer

Model

Video Signal

B/W Video Printer

SONY

UP-895MDW

NA

B/W Video Printer

SONY

UP-D897MD

NA

Video Cassette Recorder

Mitsubishi

HS_MD3000U HS_MD3000E

NTSC PAL

Video Cassette Recorder

SONY

SVO-9500MD SVO-9500-MDP

NTSC PAL

UP-51MD Color Video Printer

SONY

UP-D21 UP-D55 UP-D23MD

3-12

Section 3-6 - System Configuration

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-6-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system)

Figure 3-8 External I/O Panel Labels (Prior to BT03)

1

8

2

9

3

4

5

10

11

12

7

6

13

14

Figure 3-9 External I/O Panel Connectors

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-6-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) (cont’d) Table 3-9

Item

External I/O Connector Descriptions

Connector Name

Table Number

Description

1

Audio Output (Left)

RCA Phono Jack

2

Audio Output (Right)

RCA Phono Jack

3

Trigger Output

4

Footswitch

5

RS232 Com1

6

Expose 1

Table 3-11

Mini-phone Jack

7

Expose 2

Table 3-11

Mini-phone Jack

8

Modem Connection

Table 3-12

RJ-11 with global adapter kit for connection

9

Composite Video Out

10

B/W Video Out

11

S-Video Output

Table 3-13

4 pin mini-DIN

12

S-VGA Output

Table 3-14

DSUB-HD22 15 Pin female

13

USB (1)

Table 3-15

14

Ethernet Connection

Table 3-16

3-14

BNC Connector Table 3-10

Hirose Electric Co. RM12BRB-5S, Footswich transport shelf is in the back at the bottom DSUB 9 pin male

BNC Connector, Color Output BNC Connector, Black and White Output

Section 3-6 - System Configuration

RJ-45 Connector

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 3-6-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

External I/O Pin Outs Table 3-10

Table 3-11

Table 3-12

Table 3-13

Footswitch Connector Pin No

Output Signal

Description

1

Foot 1

Left switch

2

Floating Ground

Ground

3

Foot 2

Center switch

4

Floating Ground

Ground

5

Foot 3

Right switch

Remote Expose 1 & 2 Connectors Pin No

Output Signal

Description

1

SHUTTER/PRINT

Print command to external device

2

Signal GND

Ground

Pin No

Output Signal

Description

2

TEL L4

Telephone L4

3

TEL L2

Telephone L2

4

TEL L1

Telephone L1

5

TEL L3

Telephone L3

Others

NC

Non-connection

Pin No

Output Signal

Description

1

SVIDEO OUT/IN YG

Y (Luma) GND

2

SVIDEO OUT/IN CG

C (Chroma) GND

3

SVIDEO OUT/IN Y

Y (Luma) SIGNAL

4

SVIDEO OUT/IN C

C (Chroma) SIGNAL

Modem, RJ11 Modular 6 Pin

S-Video Connector, 4 Pin

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 3-6-4-1

External I/O Pin Outs (cont’d) Table 3-14

Table 3-15

Table 3-16

3-16

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

S-VGA Connector, Shrinked Sub-D 15 Pin Pin No

Output Signal

Description

1

VGA OUT1 R

Red

2

VGA OUT1 G

Green

3

VGA OUT1 B

Blue

4, 9,11,12,15

N/C

N/C

5, 6, 7, 8, 10

GND

GND

13

VGA OUT1 HS

H Sync

14

VGA OUT1 VS

V Sync

Pin No

Output Signal

Description

1

VCC

USB Power Supply

2

- Data

USB Data (-)

3

+ Data

USB Data (+)

4

GND

USB Power Ground

USB (A) Connector

Ethernet Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin Pin No

Output Signal

Description

1

ETHER TD

Ethernet RD+

2

ETHER TD

Ethernet RD-

3

ETHER RD

Ethernet TD+

6

ETHER RD

Ethernet TD-

Others

NC

Non-connection

Section 3-6 - System Configuration

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-6-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Other I/O Ports (Front of system)

3

4

1

2 5

6

Figure 3-10 Front Connectors

Table 3-17

Front I/O Connector Descriptions

Item

Connector Name

Description

1

USB

On BEP 3.x/4.x Only

2

USB

On BEP 3.x/4.x Only

3

CW

CW probe connection port (optional)

4

4D

4D Probe connection port (optional)

5

Probe Connectors

The two left most connectors are recommended for 4D Probe placement

6

USB

On upper console for wired voice connection Only

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-6-5

Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d) Table 3-18

Table 3-19

Table 3-20

3-18

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CW Connector, J1 (Optional) Pin No

Output Signal

Description

2

DOPIN

COAX CENTER, RED JACKET

3

DOPIN GND

COAX SHIELD, RED JACKET

5

ID0

R1-2

6

PCW

COAX CENTER, WHT JACKET

7

PCW GND

COAX SHIELD, WHT JACKET

8

ID1

R1-1

10

OUTER SHIELD

Shell

OUTER SHIELD

4D Connector (Optional) Pin No

Signal

4

GND

8

SIN_DRV

7

SIN_RTN

2

ACTIVE

5

COS_RTN

6

COS_DRV

3

HALL1

Flock of Birds, Small Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10) Pin No

Signal

1

EEC

2

EXC_RTN

3

Rx_Y

4

Rx_X

5

Rx_RTN

6

Rx_Z

7

EXC

8

EED

Section 3-6 - System Configuration

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-6-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d) Table 3-21

Flock of Birds, Large Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10) Pin No

Signal

1

TYRTNO

2

EECO_TX

3

EED_TX

4

PWM_EMI

5

TXRTN0

6

TZRTN0

7

VCC_

8

GND

Center

TYRTNO

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

3-6-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Video Specification Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the LOGIQ™ 9.

NOTE:

800x600 75hz is the only output available for external video connectors

Table 3-22

3-20

Video Specifications

CRT

External Video Connection CRT and LCD

LCD

Timing Parameter

1024x768 75Hz

800x600 75Hz

1280x1024 60Hz

Horizontal Rate [kHz]

60.02

46.88

64.00

Horizontal Period [µs]

16.66

21.33

15.62

Pixel Clock [MHz]

78.75

49.50

108.00

H Blank Width [µs]

3.66

5.17

3.77

H Sync Width [µs]

1.22

1.62

1.03

H Front Porch [µs]

0.20

0.32

0.44

Active Horizontal Period [µs]

13.00

16.16

11.85

Vertical Rate [Hz]

75.03

75.00

60.00

Vertical Period [ms]

13.33

13.33

16.67

V Sync Width [lines=ms]

32=0.53

25=0.53

not available at printing

V Front Porch [lines=µs]

3=50.00

3=64.00

.016ms

Equalization Gate [lines=µs]

1=16.66

1=21.3

N/A

Lines: Field/Frame

800

625

1066

Active Lines/Frame

768

600

1024

Section 3-6 - System Configuration

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-7 Available Probes See Specifications in the LOGIQ™ 9 User Reference Manual for probes and intended use. See Chapter 9 "Renewal Parts" on page 9-1, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement probes.

Section 3-8 Software/Option Configuration Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date Format. For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System. For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-9 Connectivity Setup Worksheet Site System Information Comments:

Floor:

Site: Dept:

Room: Type:

LOGIQ SN:

REV:

CONTACT INFORMATION Name

Title

Phone

E-Mail Address

TCP/IP Settings Name - AE Title:

IP Settings

Remote Archive Setup

IP Address:

Remote Archive IP:

Subnet Mask:

Remote Archive Name:

Default Gateway:

Services (Destination Devices) Device Type

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3-22

Manufacturer

Name

IP Address

Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup Worksheet

Port

AE Title

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-10 Before Starting a Software Upgrade This information has been moved, see Section 8-6 "Before Starting a Software Load" on page 8-17

Section 3-11 Loading Base Image Software This information has been moved, see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26 Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38

Section 3-12 Loading Application Software This information has been moved, see Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44 Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49, or Section 8-13 "Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-56

Section 3-13 System Setup This section has been moved - See Section 8-15 on page 8-65

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-14 Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color

3-14-1

Printer Set Up (R4.x and later) 1.) Attach the USB cable from the printer to the USB port on the back of the ultrasound system. The New Hardware detected pop-up will be displayed briefly. 2.) If you’re attaching an HP Deskjet 990Cxi or 970Cxi printer or HP Deskjet 6122, the system should immediately recognize the newly attached printer and automatically install and configure the printer for you without any additional user intervention. On Systems Running Software prior to R4.x.x follow the steps in 3-14-2 on page 3-24.

3-14-2 3-14-2-1

Printer Set Up (R2.x) To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software If you must connect the printer in the following order: Base Image Software -> Printer -> Application software, complete the following steps: 1.) Install the Base Image Software. 2.) Plug in the printer USB cable and the system will recognize the device. 3.) Load the Application Software. .

3-24

Section 3-14 - Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-15 Paperwork NOTE:

3-15-1

During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during operation and service of the complete system.

Product Locator Installation Upon completion of the system set up, complete and mail the Product Locator Installation card.

NOTE:

The Product Locator Installation card may vary from the Product Locator cards below.

Figure 3-11 Product Locator Installation Card

3-15-2

User Manual(s) Check that the correct User Manual(s), for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.

Chapter 3 System Setup

3-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER3.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 3-16 Checks Perform all functional checks.

3-26

Section 3-16 - Checks

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 4 Functional Checks Section 4-1 Overview 4-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 4 This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. System operation is verified at the factory. Table 4-1

Chapter 4 Contents

Section

Description

Page Number

4-1

Overview

4-1

4-2

General Procedure

4-2

4-3

Software Configuration Checks

4-23

4-4

Peripheral Checks

4-24

4-5

Mechanical Function Checks

4-25

NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the LOGIQ™ 9

Quick Guide / User Guide (see below).

Table 4-2

4-1-2

Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers

Application Software Version

Direction Number

R2.X

2309820-100

R3.X

2384458-100

R4.X

5113779-100

R6.X

5140807-100

R7.X

5173872-100

R9.X

5338270-100 (User Guide)

Required Equipment •

An empty (blank) MO Disk (If system has a Magneto-Optical Drive) or blank CD-R or DVD-R.

•

At least one transducer. See “Probes” on page 1-70. for an overview. (normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-2 General Procedure CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9

TAG

&

LOCKOUT Signed

4-2

Date

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: 1. Turn off the breaker. 2. Unplug the system. 3. Maintain control of the system power plug. 4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-1 4-2-1-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

System Features Control Panel

15

2

5

1

19 18

11

17

16 14 3 6

4

14

7

13

8

10

9

12

Figure 4-1 Control Panel Tour

1. Touch Panel and Controls

11. Depth

2. Touch Panel Brightness Control

12. Imaging Feature Keys

3. Video

13. Freeze and Print Keys

4. Audio On/Off and Volume

14. Probe Holder

5. TGC

15. Gel Holder

6. Reverse

16. On/Off Switch

7. Additional Feature Keys

17. 4D probe holder insert

8. Keyboard

18. USB Connector - for wired mic only

9. Mode/Gain Keys

19. Subwoofer Volume knob - retain settings set at factory

10. Imaging/Measurement Keys

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 4-2-1-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Touch Panel

Figure 4-2 Touch Panel Display Tour - BT06

Table 4-3

NOTE:

Touch Panel Display

1. Patient

Enters Patient screen.

2. Scan

Enters scanning mode screen.

3. Reports

Activates default report and Touch Panel of report choices.

4. End Exam

Activates Image Management and Touch Panel with end of exam options.

5. Utility

Activates the configuration system.

6. Preset

Selects the application to use.

7. Probe Indicator

Indicates and selects the probes.

Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu is selected. At the bottom of the Touch Panel, there are five combination rotary dials/push buttons. The functionality of these rotaries changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu. Press the button to switch between controls (as with Focus Position/Number), or rotate the dial to adjust the value.

4-4

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 4-2-1-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Monitor Display

Figure 4-3 Monitor Display Tour

Table 4-4 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Monitor Display Features

Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, Operator Identification. Patient Name, Patient Identification. Power Output Readout GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker. Image Preview. Gray/Color Bar. Cine Gauges Worksheet/Direct Report Measurement Summary Window. Image. Measurement Calipers. Measurement Results Window + Direct Report Image Clipboard. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset.

15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Imaging Parameters by Mode. Focal Zone Indicator. TGC. Depth Scale. Body Pattern. Image Management Icons: Active Images, Delete, Previous/Next Image and Menu. 21. Current date and time, Caps Lock: (lit when on), network connection indicator (PC=connected, PC with X=not connected), Human face (VoiceScan), iLinq, system messages display. 22. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, M&A (Measurement and Analysis), Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power On / Boot Up

DANGER

ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.

DANGER

NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE SAFETY GROUND.

DANGER

ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).

CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES. NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables, and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.

NOTE:

Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five -5- seconds. When turning OFF the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.

NOTE:

When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.

NOTE:

If the unit has been unplugged or main breaker in the OFF state for more than 3 to 5 days, the unit may not boot, or may beep when turned on.

NOTE:

After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.

NOTE:

On BEP3.X and BEP4.X, there is a blinking stand-by indicator. When the ON/OFF switch blinks between green and amber, the system is in STANDBY.

4-2-2-1

To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner Connecting the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements. 1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the power switch is turned OFF. 2.) Verify that the onsite mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the unit. 3.) Verify the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the scanner is OFF. 4.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible damage. 5.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system. 6.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.

4-6

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power On / Boot Up (cont’d) 7.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly. 8.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.

Cable Clip Circuit Breaker Mains Power Cable

Figure 4-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals, the Back End Processor and the Front End Power Supply. NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the Control panel illuminates amber,

indicating the system is in System Ready Mode. NOTE:

4-2-2-2

If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time. To Boot Up Back End Processor 1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once. The Back-End Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No status messages are displayed during this process.

ON / OFF Switch

Figure 4-5 ON/OFF switch for Back End Processor Boot Up

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Standby Mode Use Standby Mode to decrease the power off/on time while transporting system for a portable exam.

NOTE: 4-2-3-1

DO NOT put the system in Standby Mode more than 20 times in a row. You should power off the system daily. To Place System in Standby Mode 1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays. 2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby. The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green. 3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power cable or switching off the breaker. The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:

NOTE:

-

If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power On/Off button starts blinking on/off.

-

If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15 seconds.

Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch will blink while the system is in Standby Mode. Because of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04. 4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall. The system beeps.

NOTE:

DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged, this will turn the system off. 5.) Transport the system as needed and plug it back in within 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.

NOTE:

It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months.To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.

NOTE:

If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time. See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.

4-2-3-2

To Wake the System from Standby Mode 1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than.25 seconds. If you press the On/Off switch too long, the system will shutdown. It takes about 45 seconds for the system to become fully functional.

4-8

NOTE:

If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of Standby Mode.

NOTE:

Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-4 NOTE: 4-2-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Off / Shutdown After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly. To Power Off Back-End Processor 1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu. 3.) Allow the system to close files and shutdown. Wait until the standby light turns amber.

Figure 4-6 System Exit Menu for Back End Processor Power Off

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 4-2-4-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

To Shut Down Scanner

Cable Clip Circuit Breaker Mains Power Cable

Figure 4-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner .

NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the

uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system. NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file

corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE. WARNING

Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable is required before servicing or relocating the scanner. For USA only:

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains Power Cable plug.

TAG

&

LOCKOUT Signed

Date

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9 When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: 1. Turn off the breaker. 2. Unplug the system. 3. Maintain control of the system power plug. 4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet. 1.) From the rear of the system, switch OFF the Circuit Breaker. 2.) Slip the Cable Clip off the shoulders on the molded plug, then disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the scanner.

4-10

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-5 4-2-5-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Probe/Connectors Usage To Connect a Probe 1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case. 2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable. 3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage. 4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise. 5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place. 6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector. 7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not resting on the floor.

4-2-5-2

To Activate a Probe Select the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the Touch Panel. The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically.

4-2-5-3

To Deactivate a Probe When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode. 1.) Press the Freeze key. 2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for complete probe cleaning instructions.) 3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder. Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.

4-2-5-4

To Disconnect a Probe Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe. 1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port. 2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free. 3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-6 4-2-6-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Using CINE To Activate CINE 1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE. 2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.

4-2-6-2

To Omit Images 1.) Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.

4-2-6-3

To Restore Images 1.) To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.

4-2-6-4

To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame 1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame. 2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.

4-2-6-5

To Start Frame/End Frame 1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop. 2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the left to move backward through the CINE Loop.

4-2-6-6

To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed 1.) Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.

4-2-6-7

To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE 1.) To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select B Only. 2.) To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select TL Only. 3.) To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press Cine Mode Selection and select B/TL.

4-2-6-8

To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame 1.) Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.

4-12

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-7

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide For Image Management functionality, refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide. It talks about several topics: • Clipboard

• TCP/IP

• Printing Images

• Services (Destinations)

• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image

• Buttons

• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation

• Views

• Starting an Exam

• Verifying and Pinging a Device

• Configuring Connectivity

Table 4-5

Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers

Application Software Version

Direction Number

R2.X

2309820-100

R3.X

2384458-100

R4.X

5113779-100

R6.X

5140807-100

R7.X

5173872-100

R9.X

5338270-100 (User Guide)

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-8

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

System B/M-Mode Checks For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, the Quick Guide / User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.

Figure 4-8

Table 4-6

B/M-Mode Functions

Control

Description

Power Output (Acoustic Power)

Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed

Dynamic Range

Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.

Focus Number and Position

Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.

Rejection

Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).

Edge Enhance

Brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.

Frame Average

Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.

Colorize

Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.

Gray Map

Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.

Rotation (Up/Down)

Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.

Frequency

Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.

Frame Rate/Resolution

Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.

B Flow

Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative hemodynamics in vascular structures.

Sensitivity/PRI

Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal.

Background On/Off

Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background Off lets you view just flow information.

Sweep Speed

Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.

4-14

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

System CFM and PWD Checks

Figure 4-9 CFM and PWD Functions

Table 4-7

CFM and PWD Functions

Baseline

Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing.

PRF/Wall Filter

Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display.

Angle Correct

Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured

Threshold

Assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops.

Map

Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map.

Invert

Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted.

Packet Size

Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector.

Quick Angle Correct

Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under.

Doppler Display Formats

In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or time-motion with B-Mode reference. In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority or equal priority.

Sample Volume Gate Length

Sizes the sample volume gate

Scan Area

Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving the probe

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-10 NOTE: 4-2-10-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Basic Measurements The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze. To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth 1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper. 2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue depth). 3.) Press Set to fix the start point. The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) Move the Trackball to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth). 5.) Press Set to complete the measurement. The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.

NOTE:

Before you complete a measurement: •

To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.

•

To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press Clear once.

NOTE:

To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.

NOTE:

After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point, but not data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.

4-2-10-2

To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse) 1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper. 2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper. 3.) Press Set to fix the start point. The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper. 4.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper. 5.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.

NOTE:

Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern. 6.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers). 7.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn the Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction. 8.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure. 9.) Press Set to complete the measurement. The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.

NOTE:

4-16

Before you complete a measurement: •

To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement.

•

To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 4-2-10-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Worksheets Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected from the Measurement Touch Panel.

4-2-10-4

Report Pages Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages. Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-11

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive)

4-2-11-1

For BT03 and prior The onboard 3.5 inch Magnetic Optical disk drive supports the following densities: -

Standard: 640MB; 540MB; 230MB; and 128MB

-

Overwrite: 1.3GB, 640MB; and 540MB

Magnetic Optical Drive (MOD)

Figure 4-10 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT03 and prior

4-18

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

Eject Button

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 4-2-11-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

For BT04 and later The LOGIQ™ 9 supports the portable, external Fujitsu DynaMO 1300 U2 Pocket Magnetic Optical (MO) drive to read old media and to use up unused MO disks.

NOTE:

The MO drive is intended to be a temporary storage solution only and NOT for everyday use. For permanent storage, ALWAYS use the DVD drive that is shipped with your system.

Figure 4-11 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later To Connect the Portable MO Drive 1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. The MO drive is powered by the USB port; therefore, no power cord is needed. 2.) Set the MO drive inside the side Peripheral Storage Area, next to the image printer. Make sure the MO drive sits far enough inside the storage area, but close enough to reach while plugged into the USB port. 3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the back of the system.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 4-2-11-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

For BT04 and later (cont’d) Alternative Site for MO Drive. If you have a printer that takes up the entire storage area, there is an alternative site above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. To connect the portable MO drive to the LOGIQ 9 system: 1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. 2.) Set the MO drive above the Front Peripheral Storage Area, far enough away from the edge. 3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front of the system.

Figure 4-12 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later

CAUTION DO NOT connect the MO drive to the USB port adjacent to the top of the Control Panel.

If you intend to use the MO drive semi-permanently, attach the MO drive to the system using velcro, or other secure method (not supplied by GE). DO NOT lock the Control Panel into place while the MO Drive is located above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. DO NOT load any CDs that accompany the MO device.

4-20

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 4-2-11-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Using the MOD 1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed). 2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.

NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and

the MOD could break. 3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. In some cases disk ejection is automatic. Manual ejection methods are listed below in preferred order from best (1) to worst (4). a.) When in Archive Menu, use the softkey choice –or– click Image Presets up, then click the left softkey switch up for ARCHIVE, then toggle the switch under EJECT MOD. b.) Press the Eject switch on the MOD while system is ON. c.) Press and hold the Eject switch while the system is booting. d.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the Eject switch while system power is OFF. NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator

unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection methods.

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-2-12

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

USB Drives Connect only one USB drive (USB HDD/USB flash drive) to the system in total. DO NOT connect two or more devices at the same time.

NOTE:

Do not create multiple partitions. Use USB Drive with single partition. The USB Flash Drive is an ESD-sensitive device. GE only supports the NDL 256MByte 066E0690 USB Flash Drive.

CAUTION Before removing the USB Flash Drive from the USB port, press Eject (F3) and select USB Drive from

the pull-down menu to disconnect the USB Flash Drive.

4-2-13

Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images The Backup and Restore procedures vary based on the application software that is installed. For the appropriate Backup and Restore information, see the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide

4-22

Section 4-2 - General Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-3 Software Configuration Checks Table 4-8 Step

Software Configuration Checks Task to do

1.

Verify Date and Time is correct

2.

Verify that Location (Hospital Name) is correct

3.

Verify Language settings are correct

4.

Verify assignment of Printer Keys

5.

Verify all of the customer’s options are set up correctly

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

Notes

4-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks Check that peripherals work as described below:

Table 4-9

Peripheral Checks

Step 1. 2.

Task to do

Notes

Press Freeze.

Stops image acquisition.

Press (Print

Prints image displayed on the screen on B&W or Color printer, depending on the key assignment configuration

(Print

1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or 4) on the Control Panel

3.

Press VIDEO on the Control Panel.

4.

Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. Displays the Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window

5.

Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the counter number in the counter field.

Displays number

6.

Press Set

Saves number

7.

Press VIDEO on the Control Panel

8.

Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.

9.

Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.

10.

Press video on the Control Panel and the assignable play

11.

Performs actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind Use the Assignable keys on the Control Panel or fast forward. Updates the video status icon accordingly

12.

While in playback mode, use the Trackball to Searches on the tape adjust the video playback speed and scroll through the record.

13.

Press the assignable PAUSE

14.

Press Freeze while playing back a recorded session.

Counter to save the change.

Starts the video counter at a different point:

Returns to the scanning mode Starts Recording

4-24

Displays a red dot in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun Stops recording Changes the video status icon to (Pause) Plays back an examination

Stops the tape at the desired frame. Stores the last few seconds of a recorded sequence as a cineloop. Enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section (see 4-2-6 for further information on cineloop operation).

Section 4-4 - Peripheral Checks

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 4-5 Mechanical Function Checks 4-5-1

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor

Figure 4-13

Step

Task

Note(s)

1.

Pull handle up under the platform towards you to release horizontal lock

Maneuvers the Display Platform horizontally at present level of height

Pull handle at left hand grip toward you to release the Vertical Lock

Maneuvers the Display Platform up and down (between the vertical end stops) as long as you pull the handle toward you

Pull both handles toward you to release both Vertical and Horizontal locks

Maneuvers the Display Platform both horizontally and vertically as long as you keep pulling these handles toward you

2.

3.

Table 4-10

Standard Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-5-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)

Hold here for Steps 1 and 2

Hold here for Step 3

Hold here for Step 3

Hold here for Steps 1 and 2 Figure 4-14 Operator Movement

Step 1. 2.

Task

Note(s)

Move Up/Down

Use both hands, one at the top 17” LCD the 17” LCD and one at the bottom, to adjust the LCD up and down,

Tilt Forward/Back

Use both hands, one at the top of the 17” LCD and one at the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.

Move Left/Right

Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 17” LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left and right.

3.

Table 4-11

4-26

17” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-5-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

Hold here for Steps 1 and 2

Hold here for Step 3

Figure 4-15 Operator Movement

Step 1

Task

Note(s)

Tilt Forward/Back

Use both hands, one at the top of the 19” LCD and one at the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.

Move Left/Right

Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 19” LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left and right.

2.

Table 4-12

19” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

Chapter 4 Functional Checks

4-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER4.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

4-5-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Brakes and Direction Locks Checks Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below. Table 4-13

Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions

Step

Task

1.

Press on pedal no. 2

Note(s)

Engages the brakes in full lock

2.

Press on pedal no.1

Releases the brake

3.

Press on pedal no.1 Engages swivel lock. You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked direction.

4.

Press on pedal no. 2

Releases swivel lock

NOTE:

4-5-5

The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated in step 1.

Site Log Use the site log found on Section 10-9 "Site Log" on page 10-29 to record site visits.

4-28

Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) Section 5-1 Overview 5-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 5 This chapter explains LOGIQ™ 9’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes. Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5 Section

Description

Page Number

5-1

Overview

5-1

5-2

General Information

5-2

5-3

Front End Processor

5-7

5-4

Back End Processor (BEP 1)

5-22

5-5

Back End Processor (BEP 2)

5-27

5-6

Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)

5-34

5-7

Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)

5-39

5-8

BEP Power On Path

5-44

5-9

BEP Power Off Path

5-45

5-10

Operator Console Control PWA

5-46

5-11

Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)

5-54

5-12

Internal I/O

5-55

5-13

Top Console

5-63

5-14

Monitor

5-64

5-15

External I/O

5-65

5-16

Peripherals

5-68

5-17

Modem and USB Modem

5-69

5-18

Power Distribution

5-71

5-19

Mechanical Descriptions

5-76

5-20

Air Flow Control

5-79

5-21

Service Platform

5-79

5-22

4D Option

5-91

5-23

Continuous Wave Doppler Option

5-96

5-24

PCI CW Doppler PWA card

5-97

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-2 General Information LOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used. The system can be used for: -

B-Mode

-

M-Mode

-

Color Flow Mode (CFM)

-

Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps

-

PW Doppler with high PRF

-

B-Flow Mode

-

M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging

LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up. Name Plate

Monitor Monitor Controls Op. Panel Upper Bezel Gel Warmer Touchscreen/Display TGC Slidepot Knobs Operator Console

Front Cover VCR

B/W Printer 3.5” MOD CD-ROM or DVD

Probe Connector

Backend Processor Chassis Swivel Lock

Front Bumper

Brake Release Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components

5-2

Section 5-2 - General Information

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 5-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

General Information (cont’d)

17”LCD Monitor

Monitor Controls

Name Plate

Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Gel Warmer

Touchscreen/Display TGC Slidepot Knobs

Subwoofer Knob (Do not adjust) Operator Console

VCR Front Cover

B/W Printer

Probe Connector CD-ROM or DVD Backend Processor Chassis Front Bumper

Swivel Lock Brake Release

Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with LCD Option - Major Components

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 5-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

General Information (cont’d)

19” LCD Monitor Monitor Controls Name Plate Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Gel Warmer

TGC Slidepot Knobs Subwoofer Knob (Do not adjust)

Touchscreen/Display

Operator Console

Figure 5-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD

5-4

Section 5-2 - General Information

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-2-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Block Diagram

BACK END PROCESSOR USER INTERFACE

ECG Patient Interface AC POWER

3.5" MOD

17" Monitor

OP I/O PANEL

UPS

Hard Drive

CD-ROM

ATX POWER SUPPLY POWER ON/OFF (RESET*)

PC MOTHERBOARD SONY COLOR PRINTER UP-2900MD

AGP VIDEO

PC2IO

PCVIC

PCI VIDEO

SOUND CARD

FLOCK OF BIRDS (optional)

PC2IP

Ethernet

SONY B/W PRINTER UP-890MD

USB Connection

Video Outputs

SVO-9500MD

Network Connection

SONY VCR

FRONT END PROCESSOR FRONT END BACKPLANE

FEPS

SCB

EQ4

BMP

TD7

TD6

TD5

TD3

TD4

TD1

TD2

EXTERNAL I/O TD0

PCI CABLE

FRONTPLANE

AC CONTROLLER

115Vac

XFMR BOX

230Vac

TO MODEM

230Vac

XDIF

INTERNAL I/O

RFAMP

DOPPLER

PROBES

TO MONITOR

MODEM 230Vac 115Vac

TO CARD RACK TO PC

230Vac

TO PERIPHERIALS 115 or 230Vac

TO OUTLET

Figure 5-4 LOGIQ™ 9 Simple Block Diagram

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-2-2 5-2-2-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Dataflow Control Description Data Sets Each scan mode will produce data to a corresponding data set in the Image Memory. The data sets are represented in ring-buffers. Each active data set will be allocated to one of the following types of acquisition data:

5-6

•

2-D tissue data

•

Doppler data

•

M-mode data

•

2-D Color flow

•

Trace data

•

Video Y-component data

•

Video UV-component data

•

Color M-mode data

•

RF data

Section 5-2 - General Information

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-3 Front End Processor The Front End Processor generates the strong bursts transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these signals and converts them to a digital signal.

Equalization

B Mode Processor

I,Q Barrel Shift Digital Gain

XDIF

NCO

FIR

I,Q

Synthetic Aperture

Axial Interp Detector

Vector Compound

Smoothing Filter

TD

Pulser

TGC Gen

T/R Switch

I2C Master

Rate Converter

Dynamic Range

Edge Enhance

Focal Zone Splicer

Rigel

Probe Port MUX

A/D

Top Plane

PreAmp

Power Supply Monitors

XDIF Control Board Sum

TGC

Commutator Control

Scan Bus Interface

RFAmp

Temperature Sensors HV Pwr Sup Control

Scan Bus Interface

M Peak Hold

B Mode M Mode Output

Grey 2D, M

PCI Bus 40P0 40P1 TxSync BPCLK

TD Control Bus

Front End Power Supply

TD Control

+3.3 V

System Clock Generator/ Distributor

Scan Bus

TxSync RxSync Generator

+5 V

Scan Bus

+5 V analog

240 VAC

PCI Bus

-5 V analog +12 V

Scan Sequencer

+120 V

I,Q Capture

PS ON Processed Capture (B, M)

PCI-PCI Bridge

Ring Buffer

Video Capture

Scan Control Board

Internal I/O

PCI Cable to BEP

Figure 5-5 The Front End

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) The power supply assembly receives approximately 220VAC from the secondary side of the mains isolation transformer. The FEPS assembly supplies DC regulated power to the Front End card rack of the LOGIQ™ 9. The assembly is configured as a PCB which fits into the right-most slot of the Front End card rack. It interfaces with the back plane to supply power to the Front End circuit boards. A general enable signal (PS_ON) controls enabling and disabling all FEPS Low Voltage outputs. These include +5VA, -5VA, +5V, 3V3, +12V, and +15V (all except PHVP ‘High Voltage’). An Enable circuit on the FEPS detects when PS_ON becomes valid and holds all outputs off until then. The high voltage lockout circuit monitors the +5VA, -5VA, +12VA and 3V3 supplies and locks out the PHVP supply in the event that any one of them go below 10% of their nominal value. PWR_OK is an active high TTL compatible output which provides a status indication of the AC input power. It should be capable of sinking 5mA maximum. The signal switches to a TTL ‘High’ when the AC input voltage reaches the minimum specified input level at power up. Upon loss of input voltage, PWR_OK will go ‘Low’.

5-3-2

FEPS3.x The FEPS3 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it provides the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) required by the TDs (5.x and TD6) and RFAMP2. Table 5-2

5-8

FEPS, Output Comparison

System Name

FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1 Nominal Output

FEPS3.x Nominal Output

5VPA

+5.05V

+6.0V

5VNA

-5.05V

-6.0V

5VP

+5.05V

+5.05V

3V3

3.33V

3.33V

PHVP

+121.2V / +24.2

+121.2V / +24.24V

12VP

12.12

13.0V

15VP

+15.15

+15.15

Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Front End Subsystem The LOGIQ™ 9 Front End Subsystem consists the XDIF (Transducer Interface) board, RF Amp board and eight TD (Transmit Delay) boards.

Figure 5-6 Basic Front End SubSystem The Front End Subsystem provides 128 receive and 128 transmit channels as well as gain and bandpass filtering of the received signal. 5-3-3-1

XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board

Figure 5-7 XDIF Board Functions The XDIF supports four 128 Channel probe ports with the ability to select one of the four probe ports. The XDIF supports a probe multiplexer requiring a 200V (+100V and -100V). The multiplexer in the probe will select 128 of the out of up to 192 channels. The XDIF uses a T/R (Transmit/Receive) switch on each output to the RF Amplifier board. During transmit the T/R switch prevents the high voltage transmit pulser from damaging the receive preamplifier. During receive the T/R switch isolates the receive preamp from the transmit high voltage pulser. 5-3-3-2

Top Plane Connects the receive signals from the XDIF board to the RF Amplifier board at the front of the circuit boards.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-3-3-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board (Radio Frequency Amplifier Board)

Figure 5-8 RF Amp, RF Amp2 Functions

Figure 5-9 RF Amp Board Functional Block Diagram The RF Amplifier board shall contain 128 channels of the circuitry that is necessary to amplify the small electronic echo signals that are received from the probe transducers. Each channel shall consist of a low-noise, active input termination preamplifier, a time-gain compensation (TGC) amplifier, and a low noise differential drive amplifier (buffer). The RF Amp board shall physically reside in the Beamformer card cage adjacent to the XDIFF board. The probe level analog input signals shall enter the RF Amp board on a series of board to board connectors that mate the RF Amplifier Board to the XDIFF Board. These connectors carry the transducer level receive signals that originate at the probe and make their way through the probe interface relays, and T/R switches. The digital interface, power supplies, and reference ground shall be provided to the RF Amp board by the system backplane. Each amplified signal generated by the RF Amp board shall provide a differential output and drive filter circuitry located on the TD boards via the system backplane. The TD boards perform an anti-alias filtering operation and convert the transducer signals to a 12 bit data stream that feeds the digital beamforming electronics. RF Amp2 Board The RF Amp2 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.

5-10

Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-3-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8)

Figure 5-10 Basic TD Board Functions Major functions of the TD boards are: -

Transmitter

-

Analog Receive

-

A/D (Analog to Digital conversion)

-

Digital Receiver (Rigel Beamformer Chip)

-

Control & Timing

Figure 5-11 Basic TD Input/Output Signals The TD (Time Delay) boards send 128 transmit signals to the XDIF board. The 128 receive channels from the RF board get low pas filtered, converted from analog to digital and then use the Rigel beamformer chip to generate complex digital data signals representing one or two beams of ultrasound echo information sent to the EQ board.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-3-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) (cont’d)

Figure 5-12 Basic TD Input/Output Control Signals Major control signal from the EQ board are the Digital TGC/VREF and Serial Control Bus (I2C). Control signal between the Scan Control board consist of Power, Timing Clocks, TD Control Bus and Fault Interrupts Time Delay (TD, TD4, TD5) Board Function Summary: •

Each board assigned to a subset of 16 channels.

•

Generates and amplifies the excitation waveform for each channel.

•

Digitizes the input RF signal from the RF Amplifier board.

•

Applies dynamic apodization, dynamic receive delays, and filters to the digitized RF signal.

•

Automatically adapts receive beams for speed or resolution depending on scans.

•

Sums detected echo channel to channel, then board to board. (Boards must be contiguous.) The last TD forwards the total output to the EQ.

•

Monitors current consumed for transmit and issues a fault signal if overcurrent is detected.

TD5 and TD5.1 (Time Delay 5) The TD5 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board. TD5.1 has same functionality as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s TD6 and (Time Delay 6) The TD6 Board was introduced with R6.0.0 Software and BT06. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board. TD6 has same functionality as TD5.

NOTICE DO NOT MIX TD6 boards with TD5.x boards. d

5-12

Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) The Scan Control Board combines onto one board the basic functionality of Image Port (IP), Front End Control and Timing (FECT), Scan Sequencer (SS2) and the Scan Trigger (System Timing).

SCAN SEQUENCER BLOCK

EQ_BE_RxSync PA_SCB_ACFAIL(1:0) QRS*

VP_DAT(7:0)

IMAGE PORT 2 BLOCK IP_CLK

To MEQ & BMP (EBM) GLOB_SEC_PCI(61:0)

LOC_CLK DSP PCI & CTRL

PCI Slave and Decode

(From IP2 Block) SCAN TIGGERS(2:0)

VIDEO_DAT(4:0) Video and Pipelink Input

EQ_BE_RxSync

Image Memory

IP_CLK

LOC_SLV_PCI_BUS(60:0)

PCI Interface

Local PCI Bus

IP CTRL

IP_CLK

To MEQ, BMP (EBM) SYS_SCAN_BUS(13:0)

VP_STB

IP CONTROL

FEC INT: TD_HVFAULT* HVINT* I2CINT* PRBINT* CWINT*

Scan Bus I/F

LOC_SCAN_BUS(17:0) IP_CLK

From MEQ (EBM) IQ_SCB_DAT(31:0)

VP_ADR(4:0)

SCAN I/F LE

Cable From PC PRIM_PCI(52:0)

From BMP (EBM) BM_SCB_DAT(9:0)

Scan Sequencer and Peripherals

SYSTEM TIMING BLOCK LOC_CLK

System Timing Control

IP_CLK

Clock Generation

System Clocks MFG Test Clocks SCB_EQ_RxSync

PCI 33MHz

VID_CLK FE_SYTM_BUS(59:0)

FECB_CLK(10:0)

FECT BLOCK

LOC_SCAN_BUS(13:0)

To TD Boards FEC_TD_BUS(80:0) Front End Control Board Block

IP_CLK

Figure 5-13 SCB Simplified Block Diagram

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-3-4-1

SCB, SCB2 High Level Features •

5-3-4-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Generates and buffers system clocks: -

40 MHz (40P0 and 40P1)

-

10 Mhz (BPCLK)

-

TXSync

-

RxSync

•

Configures the beamformer to fire B/M-Mode, Color, or PW Doppler vectors.

•

Controls scan sequencing in real-time; setting the vector firing order and timing intervals.

•

PCI interface to Back End Processor (BEP), BMP, and EQ or EBM/EBM2.

•

Buffers B/M data from BMP/EBM/EBM2, data from the EQ/EBM/EBM2 (for Color and PW Doppler), and video data from the VCR to transmit to the BEP for software processing and display.

•

Interface between Host PCI and TD boards.

Compatibility Only SCB2 Boards should be used with R3.0.0 software and greater

5-3-4-3

Scan Control Board LEDs Table 5-3

SCB LED Indications

Function Monitored

LED Number

LED Color

LED Function

I960 Processor

DS1

Red

i960 Fail

DS2

Yellow

i960 Local Bus Activity

DS3

Red

Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS4

Green

Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS5

Yellow

IP Master Enable

DS6

Yellow

IP Master Ready

DS7

Red

IQ Left FIFO Error

DS8

Red

IQ Right FIFO Error

DS9

Red

BM FIFO Error

Image Port

Pipelink

DS10 Scan Sequence

5-14

FIFO’s Empty

DS11

Red

Crash

DS12

Yellow

FIFO Error

DS13

Yellow

Command Pulse

DS14

Yellow

Unused

DS15

Yellow

Pause

DS16

Green

Unused

DS17

Green

Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence

DS18

Green

Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence

Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-3-4-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Scan Control Board LEDs (cont’d) Table 5-4

SCB2 2365739 LED Indications

LED Number

LED Color

LED Function

DS1

Green

FPGA Programming Done (Passed)

DS2

Red

i960 Fail

DS5

Green

Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS6

Red

Toggles during Image Port Frames

DS7

Red

Crash

DS8

Yellow

FIFO Error

DS9

Yellow

Command Pause

DS10

Yellow

Unused

DS11

Yellow

Pause

DS12

Green

Unused

DS13

Green

Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)

DS14

Green

Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board)

5-3-5-1

General Description The EQ dynamically gains and filters the received signal output from the final beamformer sum. TGC control calculates range dependent analog and digital gains. The digital gain is applied to the I/Q signal. The gained signal is then rotated in frequency to place the frequency of interest in the passband of the subsequent FIR lowpass filter. The rotator center frequency may also be range dependent. These controls, and the selection of the FIR coefficients may also be processing bank, vector number, or transmit focal zone dependent.

EQ Board Block Diagram SCAN Control I/F

Scan Control Bus

Local Board Control Temperature Monitoring Circuits Voltage Monitoring Circuits

IIC A/D Converters

Local Board Control

XDIF and Probe I/F

XDIF/Probe Bus To: XDIF & Relay

Local Board Control

Commutat or Control I/F

Comm Control Bus To: XDIF

IIC SPROM CLK-10MHZ

Local Board Control

TGC Bus To: TDs

Analog TGC

Base TGC

Analog Delay

Digital TGC

MUX

Local Board Control

V-Ref Gen

Dynamic Apodization

Gain Mod’s

LUT

Delay 5 Td: I-dat 21 Td: Q-dat 21

I (L,R) 5 Q (L,R)

Coef RAM

Gain Mod’s 5 BARREL SHIFTER

16

I (L,R)

I (L,R)

17

16 MULTIPLIER

Q (L,R) 17

I (L,R) 16 NCOM

Q (L,R) 16

Q (L,R) 16

I (L,R) NCO FPGA

16

I (L,R) FIR

16

Q (L,R) 16

Q (L,R) FIR 16

Coef RAM CLK-10MHZ

Figure 5-14 EQ Board Block Diagram

5-16

Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

I (L,R) BARREL SHIFT AND OUTPUT FPGA

16 Q (L,R) 16

Data Pipe Bus To: BMP/SCB

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-3-5-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Basic Functions •

Compensates for the attenuation of the transmitted signal in tissue by depth: performs TGC based on focal zone.

•

Compensates for frequency shift (TFC) in tissue, needed in B-Mode and M-Mode.

•

Filters out harmonics and optimizes signal to noise ratio.

•

Delivers amplified and corrected I & Q data to the BMP and the Scan Control Board.

•

Interfaces probe detection and probe ID signals between the XDIF and the host.

•

Controls transducer commutator (multiplexer) for muxed probes with more elements than channels in the beamformer.

•

Monitors active probe temperature.

•

Masters the front end (FE) I2C busses for voltage and temperature monitoring.

•

Turns off PHVP on the card rack power supply if a TD board pulls too much power or malfunctions.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-6 5-3-6-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board General Description The B/M-mode Processor (BMP) subsystem takes the digital complex data from the EQ subsystem and converts it to either B-mode (2D) or M-mode (timeline) data.

Figure 5-15 BMP Internal Functions •

Processes I & Q data for B-Mode and M-Mode imaging.

•

Calculates echo signal’s amplitude.

•

Converts sample rate to display rate.

•

Implements dynamic range and edge enhancement.

•

Splices multiple focal zones into one image.

•

Sends processed B/M data to the Scan Control Board.

Figure 5-16 BMP Control Inputs/Outputs

5-18

Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-7

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

EBM, EBM2 Board The EBM Board was used on forward production units starting with BT’02 (November 2002). The EBM2 Board was used on forward production units starting with R3.0.0 Software (BT’03 October 2003). The detailed functionality is found in the previous EQ and BMP sections.

5-3-7-1

Overview The EBM/EBM2 board is the data path interface board between the last Time Delay board (TD) and the Scan Control Board (SCB). The EBM/EBM2 receives data from the Time Delay boards, processes the data for depth attenuation effects, and passes the data on to the B/M processor, then to the Scan Control Board. This board is composed of two main sections the Equalization (EQ) and the B/M Mode Processor (BMP). The EQ section compensates for the attenuation of ultrasound in tissue. The attenuation of ultrasound in tissue is usually modeled as being linearly dependent on frequency and depth. The EQ section provides two major data processing functions to compensate for this phenomenon, Time Gain Control (TGC), and Time Frequency Control (TFC). Using TGC and TFC, the EQ ”equalizes” image signals by removing depth dependent attenuation effects from the signal, hence the name ”equalization” board. In layman terms, the EQ gives a point deeper in the body an equal opportunity to contribute to the ultrasound image as one closer to the body’s surface. The BMP section process IQ Vectors from the EQ to create B and M mode vectors. This design is composed of 12 major blocks; Synthetic Aperture, Axial Interpolator, Detector/Vector Compounder, Smoothing Filter, Rate Converter, Dynamic Range Compression, Edge enhance, Splicer, B–Mode Output, M–Mode Output, Vector Configuration and the PCI Interface.

5-3-7-2

Modes of Operation The EBM/EBM2 equalization design section supports two input data buses from the final summer of the TD board set. The two buses are referred to as the I and Q data buses (or pipes). Each two’s complement bus is 24 bits wide and passes data from the final TD board to the EBM/EBM2 board. Different system modes of operation cause the two data pipes to handle data in different ways. The EBM/EBM2 board transfers output data to the Scan Control Board over two, two’s complement sixteen bit I and Q buses. Internal EBM/EBM2 board data pipes are sixteen bit two’s complement format.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-7

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d)

Power Supply Con

HV Line

Power Supply HV Control

I2C BUS PCI BUS SCAN CONTROL BUS

Fan Control / Power Supply Measurement

SCAN Ctrl I/F

Probe Temperature Sensor

Base TGC

Analog Delay

XDIF/ Probe I/F

PS Ctrl I/F

Commutator Ctrl I/F

TGC / Vref Bus

MUX

V-ref GEN

Digital TGC Dynamic Apodization Gain Mod’s

TFC

5

LUT

TD: I-Data

5

Delay

24 Q(L,R)

Coef RAM 5

16

I(L,R)

TD: Q-Data RXSYNC TXSYNC

I2C I/F

Analog TGC

High Speed SSRAM ~ 9Mbit Configuration Flash (Host Programmed)

PCI I/F

XDIF Probe Interf XDIF Interface Bu

I(L,R)

Barrel Shifter

NCO Complex Mult

I(L,R) 16

17

Multiplier

Q(L,R)

I(L,R)

32-tap FIR

Q(L,R)

16

I(L,R) 16 Q(L,R)

Q(L,R) 16

17

24

RXSYNC Delayed

32-tap FIR

16

Barrel Shift & Output Block

I(L,R) 16

Q(L,R)

16

16

Coef RAM

CLK-20MHz CLK-10MHz CLK-40MHz

FIFO 8Kx18 IQ (Q) Data

FIFO 8Kx18

CLK-20MHz

RXSYNC Delay

FIFO 8Kx18 TXSYNC

SRAM 64Kx16

Test Vector Generator

16

Synthetic Aperture

16

Dynamic Range Compress Local SCAN Bus

PCI I/F

16

Axial Interpolation

16

8

Edge Enhance

16 16

8

Vector Configuration

Splicer

Detector & Vector Compound

8 8

15

B-Mode Output M-Mode Output

Low Pass Filter

8 8

15

Rate Converter

B/M Mode Output Test Vector Capture

15

(I) Data 10 MSB

Figure 5-17 EBM/EBM2 Board Block Diagram 5-3-7-3

EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board The EBM/EBM2 EQ section supports an eight-bit read/write data interface to the XDIF relay board. The interface is used to transfer commutator control information to the selected probe and provides host access to the XDIF relay board itself. The EBM/EBM2 board monitors four probes present and four probe hook lines from the XDIF relay board. The EBM/EBM2 EQ section monitors the lines, and generates an interrupt signal when any of the signals change state. The interrupt signal will be debounced to limit the frequency with which probe interrupts may be generated. The EBM/EBM2 board also measures the temperature of the selected probe over two lines from the XDIF relay board. The SCE pulse signal connected to the EBM/EBM2 EQ section in order to be able to support the Global Beamforming future development.

5-20

Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-3-7 5-3-7-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d) B–Mode Output Blocks The B–mode output block collect vector data and tags for delivery to the Scan Control Board. It can form output vectors from one or multiple input vectors (multi–transmit focus). The vector tags are used to form the control bytes in the output vector. Only complete vectors are sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block. The maximum vector length shall be 512 pixels.

5-3-7-5

M–Mode Output Block M–mode acquisition is nearly always a multiple firings per output vector operation. When the vector rate is higher than the display rate a peak accumulate function shall be used to provide an output which is the point–by–point peak signal amplitude of all the firings since the last output. The M–mode output block usually outputs one processed M vector after combining the receive vectors from several firings. The maximum ratio of input vectors to output vectors is 256, although this number is transparent to the hardware. M_GATE tag shall control when the current peak accumulation stops, the vector is sent and a new vector is formed. The peak accumulation shall be reset after the data is sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-4 Back End Processor (BEP 1) The Back End Processor (BEP 1) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor. Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.

PC MOTHERBOARD

SLOT 7

Front Panel HD LED

ETHERNET PCI Slot #5 SLOT 6 RS232 #3 RS232 #4 I2C RS422 INTERNAL DRIVE BAY

PC2IP

PC2IP

HARD DRIVE

PCI Slot #4 SLOT 5

IDE #1

Optional 3D system

TOP DRIVE BAY

ECG

PCI BIRD CARD PCI Slot #3 SLOT 4 DIGITAL OUT SPEAKER OUT MIC IN LINE OUT LINE IN

MIDDLE DRIVE BAY

MOD SOUND CARD

PCI Slot #2 SLOT 3 BOTTOM DRIVE BAY

CD RW

PCI VIDEO PCI Slot #1

IDE #2

SLOT 2

UPS Battery AGP VIDEO AGP Slot

SLOT 1

JWR1

CPU #1

10/100bT

DIMM Slot #2

DIMM Slot #1

256 MB DIMM

JWOL1

DIMM Slot #3

JFP1

DIMM Slot #4

UPS

256 MB DIMM

PARALLEL USB1

CPU #2

USB2 COM1 COM2 (EXT)

AC POWER

ATX POWER SUPPLY

PCIO MODULE POWER S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 PCIO Board Control

SVGA IN

SVGA OUT 1

RGB OUT PCVIC Board

Figure 5-18 CPU/Back End Processor BEP1 NOTE:

5-22

Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances. Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Enclosure The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and two 733MHz processors

5-4-2

PCI Cards Five (5) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following: 1.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel 2.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers 3.) Blank or PCI Bird 3D Card - Option 4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor 5.) Network Interface Card - 3Com Ethernet Card

5-4-3

AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card •

5-4-4

Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.

•

Resolution shall be 800x600.

•

Support for 32 bit True Color

•

Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.

•

128-bit internal memory interface.

•

Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).

•

Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).

PCIO Board This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis. -

5-4-5

Power and Internal PCI control signals

PCI Video Card -

Input from AGP Video card

-

SVGA output to the image monitor

-

RGB output to color printer

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-4-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

UPS Battery Operation The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as: -

Circuit Breaker in the OFF position

-

System unplugged from the wall outlet

If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position. The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.

5-4-7

5-4-8

Internal Storage Devices: •

A 20 or 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.

•

3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).

•

CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).

Location of the Back End Processor

P3 Backend Processor

Left Side of scanner

Rear Side of Scanner

Front of Scanner

Figure 5-19 Backend Processor 1 mounted in scanner

5-24

P4 Backend Processors typically have a fan in the center of the cover

Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-4-9 5-4-9-1

5-4-9-2

5-4-9-3

5-4-9-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Inputs (BEP 1) AC Power Table 5-5

AC Power

Input

Description

Connection from:

230 VAC

AC Power

AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor

Input

Description

Connected to:

+5Vstb

Standby voltage

DC Power Supply via Backplane

GND

Electrical Ground

DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

PWR_OK*

Power verification signal from Card Rack

Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO

ON/OFF Switch

Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.

ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO

I2C Register Interrupt

Interrupt signal from I2C Bus

EIO > IIO > PC2IO

Microphone in to BEP

Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console)

Top Console > IIO > BEP

Audio in to BEP

Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio

DC Voltages Table 5-6 DC Input Voltages

Input Signals Table 5-7 Input Signals

Top Console > IIO > PC2IO

Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP

Bi-directional Signals Table 5-8 Bi-directional Signals Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

UPS Control RS232

Control Signals to and from the UPS

BEP > IIO

RS232 XDCTRL

Not Used

PC2IO > IIO > Not Used

I2C Bus

Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions.

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

Spare RS232

Not Used

PC2IO > IIO > Not Used

VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232)

Control signal to Internal VCR

PC2IO > IIO > VCR

USB #1

USB bus to Top Console

PC2IO > IIO > Top Console

COM 1

Can be configured to transfer report page data

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

COM 2

Modem

PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem

Ethernet

Standard TCP/IP Ethernet

BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network

USB #2

USB Bus for External Units

BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-4-10

Outputs Table 5-9

5-26

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Output Signals

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

+5VDC

DC Voltage

PC2IO > IIO

+12VDC

DC Voltage

PC2IO > IIO

PS_ON*

TBD (Active Low)

PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack

Standby

TBD

PC2IO > IIO > Top Console

SVideo

SVideo Out

PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO

CVideo

Composite Color Video

PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen

PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console)

BEP > Top Console

BW Video RGB

BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

Audio Out

Audio Out from BEP

TRIG

Video Trig Signal

Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)

PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9 BEP > IIO > Internal VCR BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR PC2IO > IIO > EIO

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-5 Back End Processor (BEP 2) The Back End Processor (BEP 2) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor. Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing. PC MOTHERBOARD Front Panel HD Led

USB5/6

PCI Slot #6

RS232 #3 RS232 #4 I2C RS422

PC2IPIIB PCI Slot #5

INTERNAL DRIVE BAY

HARD DRIVE SATA 0

PCI Slot #4

TOP DRIVE BAY

ECG

Frame Grabber

MIDDLE DRIVE BAY

FP USB2

PCI Slot #3

MOD

SCSI Card PCI Slot #2

PCI Slot #1

BOTTOM DRIVE BAY

IDE #2

DVD RW

AGP card with DVI Output

FP USB 1

AGP Slot

Channel A DIMM Slot #0

USB3/4 USB1/2 CPU Fan

Channel A DIMM Slot #1

512 MB DIMM

Channel B DIMM Slot #0

512 MB DIMM

Front Panel Header

Motherboard SVGA Channel B DIMM Slot #1

UPS AC POWER

ATX POWER SUPPLY

POWER

USB3/4

COM1

CPU PARALLEL

Chassis Rear Fan

10/100bT

POWER S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2

DGIO Board Control

FAN quick disconnect

DVI IN SVGA OUT 1

CHASSIE FAN

RGB OUT

DGVIC Board

Figure 5-20 CPU/Back End Processor BEP2 NOTE:

Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-5-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Enclosure The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and one 2GHz processor.

5-5-2

PCI Cards Six (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following: 1.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers 2.) Blank or FOB 3.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel 4.) USB Control 5.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor 6.) Blank or CW option

5-5-3

5-5-4

AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC •

Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.

•

Resolution shall be 800x600.

•

Support for 32 bit True Color

•

Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.

•

128-bit internal memory interface.

•

Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).

•

Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).

PCIO Board: This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis. -

5-5-5

Power and Internal PCI control signals

PCVIC Card -

Input from Motherboard AGP Video (BEP 2.0)

This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.

5-28

-

SVGA output to the image monitor

-

RGB output to color printer

Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-5-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002) The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the DGVIC board. The DGVIC converts the digital video to RGBS, SVGA (to Monitor and External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. The DGIO provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.

5-5-7

Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 Additional memory was added to the motherboard for R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. One of the 256 MByte SIMM modules was replaced with a 512 MByte module. This brings the total RAM memory to 768MBytes and designated the unit to be a BEP2.2.

5-5-8

DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade It is possible that older P3 Back End Processor video chains could be upgraded to digital. This involves replacing the Analog AGP Video card with a Matrox video card that has analog and video outputs. The PC2IO/PCVIC Tray assembly is also replaced with the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. Digital video is supplied by the Matrox video card to the DGVIC for distribution to peripherals. Monitor video is taken directly from the Analog output of the Matrox video card instead of the DGVIC.

5-5-9

UPS Battery Operation The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as: -

Circuit Breaker in the OFF position

-

System unplugged from the wall outlet

If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position. The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.

5-5-10

Internal Storage Devices •

A 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.

•

3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).

•

CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-5-11

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Location of the Back End Processor

BEP 2

Rear Side of Scanner

Front of Scanner Left Side of scanner

Figure 5-21 Backend Processor 2 mounted in scanner

5-30

Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-5-12 5-5-12-1

5-5-12-2

5-5-12-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Inputs AC Power Table 5-10

AC Power

Input

Description

Connection from:

230 VAC

AC Power

AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor

Input

Description

Connected to:

+5Vstb

Standby voltage

DC Power Supply via Backplane

GND

Electrical Ground

DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

PWR_OK*

Power verification signal from Card Rack

Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO

ON/OFF Switch

Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.

ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO

I2C Register Interrupt

Interrupt signal from I2C Bus

EIO > IIO > PC2IO

Microphone in to BEP

Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console)

Top Console > IIO > BEP

Audio in to BEP

Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio

Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP

DC Voltages Table 5-11 DC Input Voltages

Input Signals Table 5-12 Input Signals

Top Console > IIO > PC2IO

Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-5-12-4

Bi-directional Signals Table 5-13

NOTE:

5-5-12-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Bi-directional Signals

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

UPS Control RS232

Control Signals to and from the UPS

BEP > IIO

RS232 XDCTRL

Not Used

PC2IO > IIO > Not Used

I2C Bus

Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions.

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

Spare RS232

Not Used

PC2IO > IIO > Not Used

VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232)

Control signal to Internal VCR

PC2IO > IIO > VCR

USB #1

USB bus to Top Console

PC2IO > IIO > Top Console

COM 1

Can be configured to transfer report page data

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

COM 2

Modem

PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem

Ethernet

Standard TCP/IP Ethernet

BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network

USB #2

USB Bus for External Units

BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit

BEP2.x processors have one Com Port and six USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the modem via the Internal I/O. A USB to Serial Converter feeds the external serial connection via the Internal I/O. BEP 2.1 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. BEP 2.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard. USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup (RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O) The Prolific USB to RS232 Adapter Cable (black one) should be properly set up when the Base Image Load is applied to the system. However, if you need to set a specific parameter for the USB COM Port (COM1) perform the following steps: -

After booting up with the Service Key (Dongle), entering Maintenance Mode and Windows, select My Computer>Properties>Hardware Tab>Device manager.

-

Under Ports (COM & LPT) select “Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm/Port (COM 3)” and select Properties.

-

Under the Port Settings TAB you can set the Bits per second, Data bits, Parity Stop Bits and Flow Control to the desired values.

Table 5-14

5-32

Factory Default Values Signal Name

Setting

Bits Per Second

9600

Data Bits

8

Parity

None

Stop Bits

1

Flow Control

None

Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-5-13

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Outputs Table 5-15

Output Signals

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

+5VDC

DC Voltage

DG2IO > IIO

+12VDC

DC Voltage

DG2IO > IIO

PS_ON*

TBD (Active Low)

DG2IO > IIO > Card Rack

Standby

TBD

DG2IO > IIO > Top Console

SVideo

SVideo Out

DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO

CVideo

Composite Color Video

DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen

DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO

VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console)

BEP > Top Console

BT06 17” LCD (with Matrox VID card)

(2 connectors: LCD and PCI DGVIC)

BW Video RGB

BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

Audio Out

Audio Out from BEP

TRIG

Video Trig Signal

VGA

DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO BEP > IIO > Internal VCR BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

5-33

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-6 Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) The Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor. Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.

On BEP 3.x with LCD units only: This card is replaced with the Matrox Dual Output video card

Figure 5-22 CPU/Back End Processor BEP3.x NOTE:

5-34

Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.

Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-6-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Enclosure The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and a 3.2 GHz processor.

5-6-2

PCI Cards Six (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following: 1.) USB 2.0 Hub Card 2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card 3.) PCI Video Card 4.) PCI DGVIC Card 5.) PC2IP Card 6.) Blank or CW Card

5-6-3

5-6-4

AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card •

Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.

•

Resolution shall be 800x600.

•

Support for 32 bit True Color

•

Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.

•

128-bit internal memory interface.

•

Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).

•

Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).

•

AGP Video Card (CRT only)

•

Matrox Dual Output Video Card replaces standard AGP Video card (LCD only).

PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the PCI DGVIC board. The PCI DGVIC converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.

5-6-5

UPS Battery Operation The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition is defined as: -

Circuit Breaker in the OFF position

-

System unplugged from the wall outlet

If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position. The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six (6) months. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-35

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-6-6

5-6-7

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Internal Storage Devices: •

A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.

•

DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).

Location of the Back End Processor

BEP 3 / 3.5

Front of Scanner

Rear of Scanner

Left Side of Scanner

Figure 5-23 Backend Processor mounted in scanner

5-36

Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-6-8 5-6-8-1

5-6-8-2

5-6-8-3

5-6-8-4

NOTE:

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Inputs (BEP 3.x) AC Power Table 5-16

AC Power

Input

Description

Connection from:

230 VAC

AC Power

AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor

Input

Description

Connected to:

+5Vstb

Standby voltage

DC Power Supply via Backplane

GND

Electrical Ground

DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

PWR_OK*

Power verification signal from Card Rack

Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO

ON/OFF Switch

Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.

ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO

I2C Register Interrupt

Interrupt signal from I2C Bus

EIO > IIO > PC2IO

DC Voltages Table 5-17 DC Input Voltages

Input Signals Table 5-18 Input Signals

Top Console > IIO > PC2IO

Bi-directional Signals Table 5-19 Bi-directional Signals Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

UPS Control RS232

Control Signals to and from the UPS

BEP > IIO

I2C Bus

Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions.

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232)

Control signal to Internal VCR

PC2IO > IIO > VCR

USB #1

USB bus to Top Console

PC2IO > IIO > Top Console

COM 1

Can be configured to transfer report page data

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

COM 2

Modem

PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem

Ethernet

Standard TCP/IP Ethernet

BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network

USB #2

USB Bus for External Units

BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit

BEP3 processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the Internal I/O. BEP 3 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI DGVIC Tray. BEP 3 processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-37

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-6-9

Outputs Table 5-20

5-38

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Output Signals

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

+5VDC

DC Voltage

Bulkhead > IIO

+12VDC

DC Voltage

Bulkhead > IIO

PS_ON*

TBD (Active Low)

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card Rack

Standby

TBD

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top Console

SVideo

SVideo Out

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

CVideo

Composite Color Video

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console)

BEP > Top Console

BW Video RGB

BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

Audio Out

Audio Out from BEP

TRIG

Video Trig Signal

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)

BEP > IIO > Internal VCR BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-7 Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) The Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor. Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.

Figure 5-24 CPU/Back End Processor BEP4.x NOTE:

Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-39

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-7-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Enclosure The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 1 GB of RAM and a 3.4 GHz processor.

5-7-2

PCI Cards Six (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following: 1.) PCI Video Card 2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card 3.) USB Cable 4.) PCI DGVIC2 Card 5.) PC2IP3 Card 6.) Blank or CW Card

5-7-3

5-7-4

AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card •

Digital output shall comply with the DVI specification.

•

Resolution shall reflect the installed monitor specifications.

•

Support for 32 bit True Color

•

Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.

•

128-bit internal memory interface.

•

Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).

•

Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).

•

PCI Express Video Card

PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards The ADD2 Card is a PCIe card that mimics the SVGA video and provides a digital video output to the PCI DGVIC2 board. The PCI DGVIC2 converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.

5-7-5

UPS Battery Operation The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition is defined as: -

Circuit Breaker in the OFF position

-

System unplugged from the wall outlet

If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position. The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six (6) months.

5-40

Section 5-7 - Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-7-6

5-7-7

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Internal Storage Devices: •

A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.

•

DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).

Location of the Back End Processor

BEP 4.x

Front of Scanner

Rear of Scanner

Left Side of Scanner

Figure 5-25 Backend Processor mounted in scanner

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-41

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-7-8 5-7-8-1

5-7-8-2

5-7-8-3

5-7-8-4

NOTE:

5-42

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Inputs (BEP 4.x) AC Power Table 5-21

AC Power

Input

Description

Connection from:

230 VAC

AC Power

AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor

Input

Description

Connected to:

+5Vstb

Standby voltage

DC Power Supply via Backplane

GND

Electrical Ground

DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

PWR_OK*

Power verification signal from Card Rack

Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO

ON/OFF Switch

Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel. (Reset button on the rear of the External I/O not active)

Top Console > IIO > PC2IO

I2C Register Interrupt

Interrupt signal from I2C Bus

EIO > IIO > PC2IO

DC Voltages Table 5-22 DC Input Voltages

Input Signals Table 5-23 Input Signals

Bi-directional Signals Table 5-24 Bi-directional Signals Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

UPS Control RS232

Control Signals to and from the UPS

BEP > IIO

I2C Bus

Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions.

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232)

Control signal to Internal VCR

PC2IO > IIO > VCR

USB #1

USB bus to Top Console

PC2IO > IIO > Top Console

COM 1

Can be configured to transfer report page data

PC2IO > IIO > EIO

COM 2

Modem

PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem

Ethernet

Standard TCP/IP Ethernet

BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network

USB #2

USB Bus for External Units

BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit

BEP4.x processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the Internal I/O. BEP4.x Processors have digital video coming from an ADD2 card going to the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI-DGVIC2 Tray. BEP4.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.

Section 5-7 - Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-7-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Outputs Table 5-25

Output Signals

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

+5VDC

DC Voltage

Bulkhead > IIO

+12VDC

DC Voltage

Bulkhead > IIO

PS_ON*

TBD (Active Low)

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card Rack

Standby

TBD

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top Console

SVideo

SVideo Out

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

CVideo

Composite Color Video

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

VGA

VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console)

BEP > Top Console

BW Video RGB

BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9

Audio Out

Audio Out from BEP

TRIG

Video Trig Signal

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9 BEP > IIO > Internal VCR BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-43

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-8 BEP Power On Path (refer to Figure 5-26 on page 5-44 ) The Back End Processor is powered ON by: -

Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.

-

The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the Internal I/O.

-

The PC Power ON signal from the II/O (B6) goes to the PC2IO (D2) then to the BEP motherboard commanding the BEP Power Supply to turn ON.

Figure 5-26 BEP Power On Path

5-44

Section 5-8 - BEP Power On Path

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-9 BEP Power Off Path (refer to Figure 5-27 on page 5-45 ) The Back End Processor is powered Off by: -

Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.

-

The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the Internal I/O to the I2C register.

-

Software detects the request to power down via the I2C buss from the II/O (B5) to the BEP (D1).

-

The system begins a controlled shut down procedure closing applications, files, turning off FE rack power and finally BEP power.

Figure 5-27 BEP Power Off Path

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-45

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-10 Operator Console Control PWA Figure 5-29 and Figure 5-28 show the audio path through the Operator Console Control Printed Wire Assembly.

Figure 5-28 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Power

Figure 5-29 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Audio

5-46

Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-10-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Console Main Cable

5-10-1-1

Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 K

I L

H J

G

F

E A

M

D C B Figure 5-30 Main Cable Drawing - prior to BT04

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-47

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-10-1-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)

Table 5-26

Main Cable Composition Prior to BT04

Item

Function

Lower to

Description

A

Safety Ground Connector

A-G

Safety Ground Connector

B

DVI to DVI Interface

B-I

Interface to the Touch Screen B- I

C

RGB to the Main Monitor

C-H

RGB to the Main Monitor C - H

D

110 VAC to the Main Monitor

D-J

110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

E

USB Audio, Microphone

E-K

USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

F

DC Power and Control

F-K

DC Power and Control to the Operator panel

G

Safety Ground Connector

A-G

Safety Ground Connector

H

RGB to the Main Monitor

C- H

RGB to the Main Monitor C - H

I

DVI to DVI Interface

B-I

Interface to the Touch Screen B - I

J

110 VAC to the Main Monitor

D-J

110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

K

USB Audio, Microphone and DC

E/F - K

USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

L

Microphone to the Operator panel

E-L

to the Operator panel Microphone

M

“Z” Release Cable

5-10-1-2

From piston to “Z” release handle on the console

Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04 Table 5-27

Connector A & G- Safety Ground

Pin

Signal

1

Ground

Table 5-28

Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

LVDS Data 2-

10

LVDS Data 1+

19

Ground

2

LVDS Data 2+

11

Ground

20

3

Ground

12

21

4

13

22

Ground

5

14

+5V

23

LVDS Clock -

24

LVDS Clock +

6

+5V

15

Return

7

Return

16

+12V Backlight

17

LVDS Data 2-

18

LVDS Data 2-

8 9

5-48

LVDS Data 1-

Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-10-1-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d) Table 5-29

Connector C & H - Touch Screen Interface

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

Red

6

Red Ground

11

nc

2

Green

7

Green Ground

12

nc

3

Blue

8

Blue Ground

13

H Sync

4

nc

9

nc

14

V Sync

5

nc

10

Sync Ground

15

nc

Table 5-30

Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

110 VAC

2

Ground

3

Neutral

Table 5-31

Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

nc

6

USB 5V

11

Ground Audio - Right

2

nc

7

USB 5V

12

Ground Microphone

3

Audio - Left

8

USB D+

13

Ground USB

4

Audio - Right

9

nc

14

Ground USB

5

Microphone

10

Ground Audio - Left

15

USB D-

Table 5-32

Connector F - Op Console Power

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

+15

6

+12V

11

Standby LED 0

2

+15

7

+12V

12

nc

3

nc

8

+12v

13

+12 Ground

4

On/Off SW0

9

+15 Ground

14

Ground USB

5

On/Off SW1

10

+15 Ground

15

USB D-

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-49

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-10-1-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d) Table 5-33

Connector K- Op Console Power, Audio, Mic, Control

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

Standby LED 0

13

+15V

25

nc

2

nc

14

+ 15V Ground

26

nc

3

On/Off SW1

15

nc

27

USB 5V

4

On/Off SW0

16

nc

28

USB Ground

5

+12V

17

MIcrophone

29

USB 5V

6

+12V Ground

18

Microphone Ground

30

USB Ground

7

+12V

19

Shield Power/Control

31

USB D+

8

+12V Ground

20

Shield Audio/Mic

32

USB D-

9

+12V

21

Audio - Left

33

Shield USB

10

+12V Ground

22

Audio - Left Ground

34

nc

11

+15V

23

Audio - Right

12

+ 15V Ground

24

Audio - Right Ground

Table 5-34

Connector L- Console Microphone

Pin

Signal

1

Microphone Microphone Ground

5-50

Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-10-1-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after K

I

H F J G

E A

M

D C B

Figure 5-31 Main Cable - BT04 and after

Table 5-35

Main Cable Composition - BT04 and after

Item

Function

Lower to

Description

A

Safety Ground Connector

A&G

Safety Ground Connector

B

DVI to DVI Interface

B&I

Interface to the Touch Screen B- I

C

Housing Terminals

C&H

Video for Main CRT

D

110 VAC to the Main Monitor

D&J

110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

E

USB Audio, Microphone

E-K

USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

F

DC Power and Control

F-K

DC Power and Control to the Operator panel

G

Safety Ground Connector

A&G

Safety Ground Connector

H

RGB to the Main Monitor

C&H

RGB to the Main Monitor C - H

I

DVI to DVI Interface

B&I

Interface to the Touch Screen B - I

J

110 VAC to the Main Monitor

D&J

110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J

K

USB Audio, Microphone and DC

E/F - K

USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel

M

“Z” Release Cable

From piston to “Z” release handle on the console

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-51

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-10-1-4

Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) Table 5-36

Connector A & G- Safety Ground - BT04 and after (5119218)

Pin

Signal

1

Ground

Table 5-37

Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface - BT04 and after (5119218)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

LVDS Data 2-

10

LVDS Data 1+

19

Ground

2

LVDS Data 2+

11

Ground

20

3

Ground

12

21

4

13

22

Ground

5

14

+5V

23

LVDS Clock -

24

LVDS Clock +

6

+5V

15

Return

7

Return

16

+12V Backlight

17

LVDS Data 0-

18

LVDS Data 0+

8 9

Table 5-38

5-52

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

LVDS Data 1-

Connector C & H - Video for Main CRT - BT04 and after (5119218)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

TMDS Data 2-

10

TMDS Data 1+

19

Ground

2

TMDS Data 2+

11

Ground

20

nc

3

Ground

12

nc

21

nc

4

nc

13

nc

22

Ground

5

nc

14

+5V

23

TMDS Clock -

6

DDC Clock (SCL)

15

+5 Return

24

TMDS Clock +

7

DDC Data (SCA)

16

Hot Plug Detect

C1

Analog Red

8

Analog Vert Sync

17

TMDS Data 0-

C2

Analog Green

9

TMDS Data 1-

18

TMDS Data 0+

C3

Analog Blue

C4

Analog Horz Sync

C5

Ground

Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-10-1-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) (cont’d) Table 5-39

Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor - BT04 and after (5119218)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

110 VAC

2

Ground

3

Neutral

Table 5-40

Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone - BT04 and after (5119218)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

nc

6

USB 5V

11

Ground Audio - Right

2

nc

7

USB 5V

12

Ground Microphone

3

Audio - Left

8

USB D+

13

Ground USB

4

Audio - Right

9

nc

14

Ground USB

5

Microphone

10

Ground Audio - Left

15

USB D-

Table 5-41

Connector F - Op Console Power - BT04 and after (5119218)

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

Pin

Signal

1

+15

6

+12V

11

Standby LED 0

2

+15

7

+12V

12

nc

3

nc

8

+12v

13

+12 Ground

4

On/Off SW0

9

+15 Ground

14

+12 Ground

5

On/Off SW1

10

+15 Ground

15

+12 Ground

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-53

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-11 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) The Patient I/O is mounted inside the Backend Processor’s cabinet with its connector panel available on the front of the scanner. The Patient IO contains the electronics for ECG, phono and two analog inputs. One of the inputs has programmable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The electronics also contains a pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements.

ISOLATION

PHONO

PHONO

ECG

ECG / RESPIRATION

AUX 1

A/D

AUX1 AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)

AUX 2 (Pulse/Pressure)

Figure 5-32 Patient I/O - Block Diagram Inputs -

Phono (from a phono heart microphone)

-

ECG / Respiration

-

AUX1

-

AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)

These signals are optically isolated from the rest of the system. Outputs Serial Trace Data via Internal I/O to the SPD Board.

5-54

Section 5-11 - Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)

Digital Trace Data to PC2IO

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-12 Internal I/O The Internal I/O is the interface between the Card Cage, PC Module, and the rest of the system, including the Top Console and the Peripherals. Table 9-26 on page 9-45 and Table 9-30 on page 9-58 have information on cable call-outs.

BACK-END PROCESSING MODULE

SVGA BD.

SVGA

SVGA MONITOR

SVGA

TOP CONSOLE

FRONT-END PROCESSING MODULE

Ctrl. signals audio & TV video

Power

USB, audio, ctrl. signals

Power

3D & ROTATION ADAPTER

Ctrl. signals

AC POWER & FANS

Ctrl. signals

RS232, I2C & ctrl. signals

PERIPHERALS (VCR & printers)

Power

PC2IP

TV video, SGVA & I2C

Power

TV - RGBS

TV video, audio, RS232, ctrl. signals

PCVIC

TV video, SVGA, RS232 & I2C

INTERNAL I/O Power

PC2IO

PAT I/O

Power

Serial data, I2C

Ethernet, USB, COM1/2 & audio

RS232

RS232, USB, I2C, Ethernet, SVGA, TV video & ctrl signals

Power

UPS

EXTERNAL I/O Power

Figure 5-33 Internal I/O Basic Interconnect

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-55

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 5-12

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Internal I/O (cont’d) TO CARD RACK

SONY VCR SVO-9500MD Remote Right Left

AUDIO OUT

Right

AUDIO IN

Left

A8 A9

SONY B/W PRINTER UP890MD

B/W Video In

RS-232C

A6 A7

RS-232C

VIDEO OUT

A2 A15 A11

Video Output

VIDEO IN COLOR PRNT VIDEO

A10

RGB & Sync

Speaker

A1

OP PANEL Audio Amp Mic Pre-Amp

Video/Mic

A3 A14

To AC CONTROL ASSY for FAN SPEED Regulation

AC Power

Op Control

MONITOR

A4 USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT

A5

SONY COLOR PRINTER UP-2900MD

Video Rcvr COLOR PRNT VIDEO

TOUCH PANEL VIDEO

USER INTERFACE D5 RGB Out PC/VIC

50M

B5

D4 SVGA Out D3 SVGA from AGP PC2IO SVGA VIDEO 50M

B6

D1 I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable

D2 Power from PC

B7 B8

COM2 (EXT)

TO INTERNAL I/O BOARD

USB #2 USB #1

B1 B3

10/100 T

B9

UPS CNTRL

PC MOTHERBOARD

COM1

B2

Line In Line Out Mic In

B4

SOUND CARD

INTERNAL I/O BOARD

SVGA VIDEO TOUCH PANEL VIDEO PCI Bus to FEP Cardrack

On LCD units only: Matrox Dual Output video card

AGP VIDEO PCI VIDEO

CD/RW

FLOCK OF BIRDS (option)

PC2IP Ethernet

MOD ECG

PC MODULE

Figure 5-34 Internal I/O Module Overview Internal I/O Enhancement for BT’03 (FC200423) Modifications were made to the Internal I/O in October of 2003 to enhance the performance of the Microphone function. Resistor values were changed in the microphone amplifier circuit to increase the gain, a capacitor was added to reduce noise as well as a modified wiring scheme and differential pre-amp to reduce noise. This new FRU is backwards compatible.

5-56

Section 5-12 - Internal I/O

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 5-12

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Internal I/O (cont’d)

Figure 5-35 Internal I/O Back End Processor Connections The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources to multiple destinations. •

SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of RGB can be fed to a color printer.

•

Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and printers.

•

The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers.

•

Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and Modem.

•

Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO.

•

Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board.

•

The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board.

•

An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-57

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-12-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Location in the Unit The Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system).

5-12-2

LEDs Nine green LEDs indicate that the respective DC Voltages are OK.

NOTE:

The -15 V LED is not used on the LOGIQ™ 9. It is normal for it to be off (not lit).

Figure 5-36 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status.

5-12-3

Fuses All output voltages are fused

5-12-4

Jumpers and Dip-switches There are no Jumpers or Dip Switches on the Internal I/O.

5-58

Section 5-12 - Internal I/O

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-12-5 5-12-5-1

5-12-5-2

5-12-5-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Inputs DC Voltages Table 5-42 DC Input Voltages Input

Description

Connection from

+3.3 VDC

Input DC Voltage

DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+5 VDC

Input DC Voltage

DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+10 VDC

Input DC Voltage

DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+15 VDC

Input DC Voltage

DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

-15 VDC

-Not used on the L9 Input DC Voltage

DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+6 VDC (analog)

Input DC Voltage

DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

–5 VDC (analog)

Input DC Voltage

DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32

+5 VDC

Input DC Voltage

Backend Processor > J17

+12 VDC

Input DC Voltage

Backend Processor > J17)

Video Input Signals Table 5-43 Video Input Signals Input

Description

Connection from

SVGA

Video Signal to External I/O

PC2IO (Connector J16)

SVHS

Video Signal to VCR & External I/O

PC2IO(Connector J16)

SVHS

Video Signal to MBD (IMP)

VCR (Connector J11)

Luma

Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O

PC2IO (Connector J16)

Comp. Video

Video Signal to External I/O

PC2IO (Connector J16)

Comp. Video

Video Signal to MBD (IMP)

Color printer

Audio Input Signals Table 5-44 Audio Input Signals Input

Description

Two channel audio

MBD (IMP)

Two channel audio Two channel audio

Connection from

VCR Audio signals, summed and distributed

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

BEP

5-59

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

5-12-5 Inputs (cont’d) 5-12-5-4

5-12-5-5

5-60

Serial Ports Table 5-45 Serial Ports Input

Description

Connection from

USB

Standard USB Serial Bus

BEPM - Top console

USB

Standard USB Serial Bus

BEPM - IEIO

Ethernet

Standard Ethernet

BEPM - IEIO

RS232

Standard RS232 Serial Bus

BEPM COM1 - IEIO

RS232

Standard RS232 Serial Bus

BEPM COM2 - IEIO

RS232

Standard RS232 Serial Bus

PC2IO - Spare (J16)

RS232

Standard RS232 Serial Bus

PC2IO - VCR (J16)

RS232

PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16)

RS232

PC2IO – UPS (Connector J16)

Control Signals Table 5-46 Control Signals Input

Description

Connection from

Control signals

Spare

MBD/FEC (Connector J16)

Control signals

Spare

MBD/FEC (Connector J16)

Trace trigger

To EIO

PC2IO (Connector J16)

Fan control signals

To AC Power

MBD (Connector J16)

Power control signals

To MBD and AC Power

PC2IO (Connector J16)

Power on/off

To Relay

Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO Test (Connector J16)

Standby

To Top Console

PC2IO (Connector J16)

Section 5-12 - Internal I/O

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-12-6 5-12-6-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Outputs DC Voltage Table 5-47 DC Output Voltages Output

Description

+5 VDC

Connection to

From BEP

+12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC,

Spare (Connector J21)

From Card Rack

-5 VDC analog +5 VDC

From BEP

+12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC,

From Card Rack

Not Used

From Card Rack

Not Used

-5 VDC analog +5 VDC, +15 VDC, +12 VDC

From BEP

+15 VDC

From Card Rack

+5 VDC

Top Console

From BEP

+12 VDC +5 VDC,

EIO

+15 VDC,

From Card Rack

-5 VDC analog +6 VDC analog

5-12-6-2

AUDIO Table 5-48

Audio Outputs

Output

Description

Connection to Top Console speakers and BEP

Audio (two channels)

5-12-6-3

Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP

VCR and IEIO

Connectors – Solder Side Table 5-49 Connectors, Solder side Input

Description

A12/J21

Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female

A13/J20

Spare – power, 15pins D-sub, female

A14/J24

AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female

A15/P23

Rotation adapter – signals, 15pins D-sub, male

A16/P22

Spare – signals, 25pins D-sub, female

P30

EIO – signals and power, 110pins male

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

Connection from

5-61

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

5-12-6 Outputs (cont’d) 5-12-6-4

5-62

Interface Connectors – Component Side Table 5-50 Connectors, Component Side Input

Description

A1/J1

B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female.

A2/P4

VCR remote ctrl – RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.

A3/P5

Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.

A4/J2

Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female.

A5/P4

Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male.

A6/J6

Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack.

A7/J7

Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack.

A8/J8

Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack.

A9/J9

Audio in from VCR, right

A10/J10

SVHS out to VCR

A11/J11

SVHS in from VCR

B1/J12

USB to Top console

B2/J13

USB to external I/O

B3/J14

Ethernet

B4/J15

Audio I/O

B5/J16

PC2IO signals

B6/J17

PC2IO power

B7/P18

COM1

B8/P19

COM2

B9/P25

UPS remote control

J32

MBD – signals and power

Section 5-12 - Internal I/O

Connection from

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-13 Top Console The Top Console includes a Stand By/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the picture quality, and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A).

Figure 5-37 Top Console BT’03 Consoles added a USB connector to the Upper Op Panel for the Wired Voice Scan Option. This connection should only be used for Wired Voice Scan.

Figure 5-38 BT’03 Top Console Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-63

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-14 Monitor 17-inch High Resolution Monitor with no interlace scan includes loudspeakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning).

Figure 5-39 Monitors: CRT (top), 17” LCD option (left), 19” LCD (right)

5-64

Section 5-14 - Monitor

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-15 External I/O The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external items.

Right Side of Scanner External I/O

Figure 5-40 External I/O

5-15-1

Location in the Unit On the rear of the scanner, above the power inlet and power breaker.

5-15-2

Input Signals Table 5-51 Input Footswitch Connector

Input Signals Description

Connection from/via/to

Footswitch is a mechanical switch that connect a signal to Footswitch > External I/O > Internal I/O ground. > PC2IO (BEP) Internal level is TTL (0-3.3V) DC Voltages from BEP

+5 VDC +12 VDC

Used for Optical Couplers on RS232 signals

PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O

DC Voltages from Card Rack +5 VDC +15 VDC -5 VDC analog

Used for Optical Couplers on Footswitch

Card Rack > Internal I/O > External I/O

+6 VDC analog

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-65

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-15-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Bi-directional Signals Table 5-52

Bi-directional Signals

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

Ethernet

Standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet

Ethernet - External I/O - Internal I/O BEP (Ethernet Connector)

COM1

Serial RS-232 port (Can be configured to transfer report page data to an external processor)

External Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)

USB

Standard USB (Universal Serial Bus), (0-5V)

USB Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (USB #2))

Modem

Internal Modem Telephone Line Connection

Analog Phone Line - External I/O (Connector Panel) - External I/O (Rear Side)- Modem

COM2

Serial RS-232 port (on rear side of External I/O)

Modem - External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)

Burn-in Power On/Off Control

Burn-in Power On/Off Control (on rear side of External I/O) - Used for factory testing.

External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O

Connection to Internal I/O Board

SVGA OUT

EXTERNAL I/O PWB

USB S-Video OUT C-Video OUT BW Video OUT 10/100Base-TX

Burn In Power ON/OFF Control

Audio (R) Audio (L)

To MODEM External I/O Upper PWB

RS232 (COM1:) TRIGGER FOOTSWITCH EXPOSE #1 EXPOSE #2

Modem Phone Connection

MODEM

EXTERNAL I/O Module

Figure 5-41 External I/O

5-66

Section 5-15 - External I/O

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-15-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Output Signals Table 5-53

Output Signals

Signal Name

Description

Signal Path

Stereo Audio

Stereo audio to external VCR. (Same signal as delivered to internal VCR).

Audio Source (Internal VCR/Microphone/BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External VCR.

Composite Video Super Video (SVHS)

External composite video, 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External sync negative. I/O > External Composite Video Device Super Video Luminance: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. Color: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. External black and white video

Black and White video

1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative.

Trig

Trigger Signal, 0-3.3V

SVGA

SVGA (RGBS) high resolution video output (Same signal as sent to the systems monitor)

PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External VCR PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External B/W Video Device

PCIDG/DG VIC > PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Monitor

Remote Expose #1

A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals

PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Peripheral

Remote Expose #2

A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals

PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Peripheral

Several signal are fed from the Internal I/O board to an External I/O board located on the rear of the system. This board contains data buffers and a galvanic isolation section. Different types of signals are fed to connectors accessible on the External I/O. •

R, G, B and Sync are provided for external RGB monitors or printers.

•

Composite video, black and white video and S-VHS video are buffered and fed to output connectors for external monitors and printers.

•

Two serial RS-232 ports are provided for external communication with e.g. the System CPU.

•

An Ethernet signal from the BEP is fed to an Ethernet connector. It is used for connectivity, including DICOM Network.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-67

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-16 Peripherals A DVR or VCR, an analog or digital Black-and-White Video Printer, and an analog or digital Color Printer may be installed on the scanner. These devices receive video signals from the Internal I/O Board and power from the AC Control Box. Peripherals are generally specified and approved regionally. BT’02 (BEP 2.1 and above) systems have digital peripheral capabilities through USB or USB To SCSI converters.

5-68

Section 5-16 - Peripherals

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-17 Modem and USB Modem 5-17-1

General Description Multi-Tech global modem. The modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line for InSite capabilities. A USB Modem was introduced at BT04. The USB modem does not require external power, and has no serial connection as it plugs directly into the back of the BEP. BT07 and later do not support the modem.

5-17-2

Location in the Unit

Global Modem

Figure 5-42 Modem: Location in Unit

5-17-3

5-17-4

Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem) •

DC Voltage from Modem Power (AC/DC Converter)

•

RS232 from Backend Processor via Internal I/O and External I/O

•

Analog Phone line via External I/O

Fuses None

5-17-5

Jumpers and Dip-switches None Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-69

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-17-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

LEDs (non-USB Modem) The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.

TDRD CD 56

3314OHTRECFX

Figure 5-43 LEDs on Modem’s Front Panel

Table 5-54 LED Color

LEDs on Modem Description

Normally State

- Red

TD (Transmit Data)

Flashes during use.

- Red

RD (Receive Data)

Flashes during use.

- Red

CD (Carrier Detect)

ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during communication. OFF indicates no or broken connection.

56 (56K Mode)

During Power On: Briefly Flashing

- Red

33 (V.34 Mode)

These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON until the modem is reset or connected the next time.

- Red

14 (V.32bis Mode)

At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF.

- Red

OH (Off hook)

- Red

ON when dialing, online, or answering a call Flashes if puls dialing Off when modem not in use ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call. - Red

TR (Terminal Ready)

- Red

EC (Error Correction (V.42))

OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will disconnect. ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON Blinking: Compression turned ON OFF: Normal operation.

- Red

5-70

FX (Fax)

Section 5-17 - Modem and USB Modem

Always OFF

Located under BEP

XFMR BOX

Main AC Power In

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 12V

5V INVERTER

12V

OP Panel 12V comes from BEP 15V comes from FEPS

5V

3.3V INVERTER

15V Audio USB

120VAC_ A 120VAC_ B 20VAC

P101

Main Cable

FB200795

F5

F4

F3

F2

F1

J10

P30

A13

A12

A5

A4

B1

BEP_12V BEP_5V RACK_15V RACK_5V RACK_-5V RACK_3V3

BEP_5V

RACK_15V BEP_5V

BEP_12V RACK_15V

B6

J32

RPWISON

J31

INTERNAL I/O A14 PS_ON_L(RPWONN)

To FE card rack

FB200802-2

To BEP

FB200802-3

To optional modem

FB200802-1

To peripherals

FB200802-4

To main monitor

Voltage feedback fan speed control coming from EBM

EXTERNAL I/O

P100

220V

220V

220V

P11

P10

P9

120/230V

P7

120V

P8

Peripheral voltage selector 100-120V

220-240V

FB200320

Fan Assembly FB200580

FANOUT_L

PS_ON_L(RPWONN)

AC Detect

RC delay

AC CONTROL BOX

12V 5V 3.3V -12V 5V_stndby

To Probe Bias (via XDIF)

A1

X D I F

A2

R F

A3

T D 0

A4

T D 1

FRONT END CARD RACK

24V Battery Pack for BEP UPS

Minus lead has a 20A fuse

BEP Power Supply

BEP

AC Adapter

070C5080

070C5080

070C5080

A5

T D 2

A6

T D 3

PC2IP

A7

T D 4

Motherboard

A8

T D 5

PCI Video

I960

USB1 5V

DGVIC &DGIO

12V 5V RPWONN RPWISON

Modem

A9

T D 6

C22

D2

To B/W Printer

To VCR

Note : BT'04 and later systems, the modem is USB attached and does not require AC power.

Note : Replaced by 3 lead cable (FC200571) and Y cable (5112631) for BT'04 and later systems.

A11

+/- 100V

E B M

A12

A13

S C B

+/- 100V from EBM for test point only on FEPS

Power_OK

Front End Power Supply (FEPS)

For BEP Power on/off signal path see Sec 5-4-14 (on) Sec 5-4-15 (off)

Arrows indicate which boards use this voltage. All voltages and Power_OK signal are generated in the FEPS except as noted.

15VP

PHVP (120V)

12VP (Digital)

5VP, 3.3VP (Digital)

5VPA, 5VNA (Analog)

Line Filter

RPWONN = Rack Power on RPWISON = Rack Power is on

070D2802

FB200798

EBM generates +/- 100V from 12VP On older systems the EQ provides: -100V (from 12VP) +100V (from 120V)

A10

T D 7

12v

To Color Printer

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LCD Display

3.3V

P6

P5

120VAC

Main Monitor

USB HUB

FB200803

FB200804

For 100-120V, connect to P5 pin1-4. For 220-240V, connect to P5 pin 3-6.

2286301

Main CB

Inrush current limiter

Reserved for Wireless Mic

L9 POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM (AC & DC)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H 1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-18 Power Distribution

Figure 5-44 Overall Power Distribution

5-71

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-18-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Power Distribution Overview The AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. The AC Power also controls and supplies the 20VAC needed by the systems cooling fan.

5-18-2

AC Power PWB

AC DISTRIBUTION PWB

TO OUTLET

AC INLET BOX INRUSH LIMIT

230Vac

115Vac

TRANSFORMER BOX

Cable #27 Mains switch

L 230Vac 20Vac

230 115

TO PERIPHERIALS (115 or 230 Vac)

TO MONITOR (115 Vac)

Cable #13

TO MODEM (230 Vac) Fan regulator

TO PC (230 Vac)

TO CARD RACK (230 Vac) CABLES INTERNAL IN AC CONTROL MODULE #27

TO A14 ON INTERNAL I/O Cable #7 M

POWER SUPPLY ON, FAN SPEED CONTROL

Figure 5-45 AC Power Distribution The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the mains outlet on site. The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system. The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power. From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter (titled: Inrush Limiter in Figure 5-45) to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer. The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains.

5-72

Section 5-18 - Power Distribution

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

5-18-2 AC Power PWB (cont’d) Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230VAC or 115 VAC (two different part numbers/FRUs). The configuration of the plug on the cable to the AC Transformer is different for the two AC Voltages. From the AC Transformer, there are three outlets; •

20 VAC

•

115 VAC

•

230 VAC

The 20 VAC is routed via the fan regulator to the system fan. (See separate description, Chapter 5 - Air Flow Control). The 115 VAC is routed via a fuse to an AC Voltage selector, used for selecting the right output voltage for the Peripherals outlet and the Monitor. (The alternative voltage to this outlet is 230 VAC.) The 230 VAC output from the Transformer is routed via a fuse and distributed to the AC Voltage selector for the Peripherals outlet and to the following AC outlets: •

Modem

•

Back End Processor

•

Card Rack

Figure 5-46 Connectors on Back of AC Controller

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-73

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-18-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Controller Differences

Figure 5-47 Original AC Controller Functions 5-74

Section 5-18 - Power Distribution

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Controller FC200403/FC200404

5-18-3 AC Controller Differences (cont’d)

Figure 5-48 AC Controller FC 200403/FC200404

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-75

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-19 Mechanical Descriptions 5-19-1 5-19-1-1

5-19-2

Monitor Standard •

Tilt: 10° forwards and backwards.

•

Swivel: 90° rotation.

Top Console Positioning

Figure 5-49 Top Console Positioning

5-76

•

Vertical Access: The control panel offers 27 inches (200 mm) of vertical adjustment.

•

Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 45° of horizontal adjustment when the Z-arm is released.

Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-19-2-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

17” LCD (Option) •

Tilt Adjustable Monitor: Tilt Angle: Up 10°, Down 90°

•

Range of Movement: Up 89mm, Down 211mm Left and Right from center: max 855mm

•

Monitor Arm Neck: plus or minus 90°

•

Monitor Arm Rotary: plus or minus 150°

•

Monitor Neck Swivel: plus or minus 90°

CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the

monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.

Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.

Figure 5-50 LCD Monitor - Positioning (17” LCD shown) 5-19-2-2

19” LCD •

Side to side ± 33cm (± 15in)

•

Tilt/Rotate Adjustable Monitor

•

Tilt Angle: Up 20°, Down 90°

•

Rotate Angle: 90° right, 90° left

•

Fold-down and lock mechanism for transportation

CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the

monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.

Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-77

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-19-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Wheels/Brakes Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below. Table 5-55

Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions

Step

Task

1.

Press on pedal no. 2

Expected Result(s)

To engage the brakes in full lock

2.

Press on pedal no.1

To release the brake

3.

Press on pedal no.1 To engage swivel lock. You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked direction.

4.

Press on pedal no. 2

To release swivel lock

NOTE:

5-78

The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated in step 1.

Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-20 Air Flow Control 5-20-1

Air Flow Distribution The fan at the rear of the scanner draws air into the scanner, through the foam filter, and pushes it through a flange that moves the air into a cavity on top of the card rack. Air holes in the bottom of this cavity allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits the card rack through holes on its internal side panel into the interior of the scanner near the rear of the Backend Processor. The internal fan in the Backend processor draws the air into the PC allowing it to pass through the interior of the PC, and exit the lower front area of the scanner.

Section 5-21 Service Platform 5-21-1

Introduction The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-79

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-2 5-21-2-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Global Service User Interface (GSUI) Internationalization The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.

5-21-2-2

Service Login Select the wrench icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen. This icon links the user to the service login screen.

NOTE:

In R4.x.x and after, the wrench icon has been removed from the upper display. To access the Service Platform, click on Utility, then select Service.

Figure 5-51 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface 5-21-2-3

Access / Security The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.

NOTE:

OnLine Center access to the scanner requires a password and they must have ‘Disruptive’ permission and customer input to run diagnostics. Table 5-56 Service Login User Levels User Level

Access Authorization

Operator Administrator

Password uls

Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service.

External Service

uls gogems

Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users.

5-80

Section 5-21 - Service Platform

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Service Home Page The navigation bar at the top of the Customer Service Home Page screen allows the user to select from several tools and utilities.

Figure 5-52 Customer Service Home Page

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-81

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Error Logs Tab From the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users.

NOTE:

Beginning with R4.x application software, some of the Log Viewer screens are different than those shown in this section. However, the basic functionality has not changed. Also, some additional navigational features have been added, such as Last Page and Get Page. The Filter Error log is keyed to GE Service login access permissions and is not available to customer level analysis.

NOTE:

Beginning with R4.x application software, filtering has been removed and all users have the same access to the logs. The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance. Table 5-57 Log Entry Key Severity

Error Level

Color Code

1

Information

Green

2

Warning

Blue

3

Error

Red

The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD, CD-Rom or DVD drive.

Figure 5-53 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries

5-82

Section 5-21 - Service Platform

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-21-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Logs The eight sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Power, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board, DICOM, and UPS Power.

NOTE:

Figure 5-53 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs. Log table headings for the different logs are as follows: •

System Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message, and TouchPanel keystrokes (BT06).

•

Power Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Analog_5V, DC_5V, DC_3.3V, Pos_15V, Analog_12V, Pos_HV, Neg_5V, Pos_100V, Neg_100V.

NOTE:

For systems running R2.x and R3.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.

NOTE:

In R4.x application software, the Power log present in R2.x and R3.x application software was renamed UPS Power as described below.

NOTE:

All readings in the Power log are in mV. Readings for analog voltages will vary depending on whether the system has an FEPS2.x or FEPS3.x. It is normal for the Pos_HV, Pos_100V, and Neg_100V to read 0. Readings for these voltages are not captured in this log. To check these voltages, run the Power Supply diagnostic.

NOTE:

NOTE:

•

Infomatics Log entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight, ExamID, ExamCategory, ExamCurDate, ExamStartTime, ExamEndTime, ActiveScanTime, FreezeTime, TimeOfImageArchived, AccessionNumber, RefPhyName, ReadingPhyName, Operator, RoomNo, BodyPatternSelected, InstitutionName, ActiveModeTime, CalculationMade, CalculationTime, HelpUsage, ProductName, SystemSWRev, NoOfSWModules, SystemPowerOnTime, SystemIdleTime, NoOfBoards, ProbeChangedDate, ProbeChangedTime, ProbeChangedStatus, NoOfProbeSlots, NoOfProbes, ProbeID, ProbeSerialNumber, and ActiveExamProbes.

•

Temperature Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Upper FEC Sensor, and Lower FEC Sensor.

In R4.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Average, TD0, TD1, TD2, TD3, TD4, TD5, TD6, TD7, EQOut, EQIn, and RFI. •

Probe Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Error Message, Severity, Revision, and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named.

•

Board Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Board, Severity, and two (2) new labels that have yet been named.

•

DICOM Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.

•

UPS Power Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.

This log was called Power in R2.x and R3.x application software. Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-83

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-21-4-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Utilities The two sub-menus of the Utilities category are Plot Log, and Plot Page.

Plot Log

Plot Page

Figure 5-54 Utilities Sub-Menus

5-21-4-3

•

Plot Log Allows for the color coded plot of all Log contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.

•

Plot Page Allows for the color coded plot of all Page contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.

Search On the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to find. This filter field works well for filtering the Sys log file for the word “fail”.

Figure 5-55 Search Sub-Menu

5-84

Section 5-21 - Service Platform

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 5-21-4-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Exit The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer, returns the user to the Service Desktop home page.

Figure 5-56 Exit Log Sub-Menu

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-85

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Diagnostics Detailed Diagnostic information is found in Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting.

NOTE:

After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.

Figure 5-57 User Diagnostic Page 5-21-5-1

Diagnostics Execution Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.

5-21-5-2

Diagnostic Reports Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for future viewing of the diagnostic logs.

5-86

Section 5-21 - Service Platform

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Image Quality The Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues.

FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-58 Image Quality Page

5-21-7

Calibration The Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system.

FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-59 Calibration Page

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-87

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-8

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Configuration The Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system. The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration subsystem. The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page. Starting with BT07 and later, this page contains the remote connectivity setup for InSite ExC.

Figure 5-60 Configuration Page

5-88

Section 5-21 - Service Platform

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Utilities The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools such as System Shutdown, the Image Viewer Utility, and the iLinq Configuration Utility.

Figure 5-61 Customer Utilities Page

5-21-10

Replacement The Replacement page is intended to contain tools used to track replacement parts used in the system.

FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-62 Part Replacement Page

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-89

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-21-11

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Planned Maintenance (PM) The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system.

FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED Figure 5-63 Planned Maintenance Page

5-90

Section 5-21 - Service Platform

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-22 4D Option Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform 4D scans.

5-22-1

Principle of Volume Acquisition The underlying principle for 3D volume acquisition and reconstruction is the formation of an image composed of multiple 2D scans at known elevation positions.

Central 2D-Scan Start 2D_Scann

Range of VOL-Sweep

Figure 5-64 Volume Acquisition The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by 2D scans with special transducers designed for 2D scans, 3D sweeps, and real time 4D scans. These transducers have imbedded motors that control the movement and positioning of the acoustic “stack”. The motor control box generates signals that determine the direction and speed that the stack is driven. The motor controller also generates signals sent to the Scan Control Board (routed through the internal IO) that are used for 3D image reconstruction. NOTE:

The fan on the motor control box is thermostatically controlled. Hence, the fan will only run when necessary. You should note that the fan activates after a fairly short period of use of a 3D/4D probe.

NOTE:

There are no LED indicators on the motor controller to aid in determining the presence/absence of AC power to the box.

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-91

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-22-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

4D Block Diagram

Figure 5-65 4D BLock Diagram 5-22-2-1

Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable The connection between the motor control box and the front bulkhead is a 15 pin sub-D (at the motor controller) and a LEMO (at the bulkhead). Table 5-58 maps the conversion from 15 pin sub-D to 7 pin Lemo. Table 5-58

5-92

Motor Controller to Bracket Cable (2375551) and 4D Probe Cable (2384183) Pin Conversions

Signal

Sub D 15 Pin on MC

Lemo on L9 (12 pin)

Lemo on Probe Cable, 12 Pin

Lemo on Probe Cable, 7 Pin

GND

7

4

4

1

SIN_DRV

1

8

8

2

SIN_RTN

2

7

7

3

ACTIVE

14

2

2

4

COS_RTN

4

5

5

5

COS_DRV

3

6

6

6

HALL1

5

3

3

7

Section 5-22 - 4D Option

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d) .

6

8

1

1 2

12 7

9

7

2

5

3 6

4

3

Pin Diagram of 7 pin Lemo connector on the small end of the 4D Probe Cable

11

10

5

4

Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the large end of the 4D Probe Cable.

1

8 12

9

2

10

7

11

3

6 4

5

Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the L9 for the Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable.

Figure 5-66 Pin Diagrams

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-93

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d) The pinout of the motor controller to the front bracket requires a 15 pin SUB-D female Connector (MC4) with the following pinout: Table 5-59

15-pin SUB-D Pinout for Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable

PIN 1

Signal name

In/Out Out

SIN_DRV_1

Description Sin1 Motor Drive Line

Characteristics 12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

9 SIN_RTN_1/

2

In/ Out

SIN_DRV_3

Sin1 Motor Return Line / Sin3 Motor Drive Line

12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

10 COS_DRV_1

Out

COS_RTN_1

5

3

Cos1 Motor Drive Line

12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

In

Cos1 Motor Return Line

12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms

HALL1

In

Null puls detector

5V TTL level

13

STRA1

In

Strobo generator sign.1

5V TTL level

6

STRB1

In

Strobo generator sign.2

5V TTL level

ACTIVE

Out

11 4 12

14 7 15

5-22-2-2

Pull down resistor in Mot-Ctrl_Box Indicates that the Mot-Ctrl-Box is with 100 Ohm to GND connected to the selected probe. Signal low = Mot-Ctrl-Box is connected to sel. probe

GND IN

Reserved_1

Out

Reserved Input

5V TTL level

Output

+ 5V low power

8

+ 5V

M1

GND

Screw of the housing

M2

GND

Screw of the housing

USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable The connection between the motor control box and the PC backend requires a standard USB compatible 5 pin USB female connector(MC2) with following pin out: Table 5-60

USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable Pin Out

PIN

5-94

Signal name

In/Out

Description

Characteristics

1

VCC

2

DM

Data minus

USB 2.0 Compatible

3

DP

Data plus

USB 2.0 Compatible

4

GND

5

SHELL

IN

Power

Section 5-22 - 4D Option

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d) The LOGIQ 9 3D/4D motor control box also includes a power supply with connection to the L9 110 VAC power distribution (MC1). 5-22-2-3

Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable A 9 pin SUB-D connection to the L9 Internal IO(MC3) requires the pin out as shown below. Table 5-61

Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable Pin Out

PIN

Signal name

In/Out

Description

Characteristics

1

VOL_TR

Out

Sig. f. volume start

3,3V TTL level

6

FRAME_TR

Out

Sig. f. frame start

3,3V TTL level

2

DIRECTION

Out

indicate probe direction

3,3V TTL level

Out

Indicate cable connection to Mot-Ctrl-Box

CONN_2

5 7

GND

3

GND

8

NC

4 9

Pull down resistor in mot-Ctrl_Box with 100 Ohm to GND Signal low = Mot_Ctrl_Box is connected to L9 system

Not connected

RESET

IN

RESET for Hardware

NC

Not connected

M1

GND

Screw of the housing

M2

GND

Screw of the housing

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

3,3V TTL level signal is low active

5-95

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-23 Continuous Wave Doppler Option Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler scans. The parts needed to perform Continuous Wave Doppler scans include:

5-23-1

•

PCI CW Doppler PWA card

•

Internal CW Doppler Cable

•

5 mHz or 8 mHz probe

•

Mu Metal Shield

Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow The signal path for the CW probes is somewhat different from other LOGIQ™ 9 probes. The signal-path from the probe does not pass through the card rack, it transitions directly from the probe to the back of the BEP. The following block diagram depicts the functional elements of the PCI CW Doppler Card in the BEP.

Tx Gain

2

Transmitter

2

Probe I.D.

Controller

2

Prog. Block Buffer

PCI I/F

PCI Bus

LIMO Connector

16 Receiver

A/D Local Oscillator Sampling Rate

Rx Gain

Figure 5-67 PCI CW Doppler PWA Block Diagram In very simplified terms, the PCI CW Doppler PWA card generates the CW signal and sends it out C34 on the back of the BEP. The internal CW Doppler Cable transfers the signal from the BEP to the CW Probe via a LEMO connector. The probe transmits the signal into the patient and receives the echo back. The CW Doppler Board amplifies the received signal then sends it via the PCI Interface to PCI Bus and on to the monitor.

5-96

Section 5-23 - Continuous Wave Doppler Option

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 5-24 PCI CW Doppler PWA card The CW Doppler has a local controller that configures transmit and receive paths. The controller performs all required signal processing in order to produce 16 bit signed integer I/Q data path. The CW Doppler transmitter output power is controlled in 1 Volt increments. The output power is adjustable continuously without stopping data collection. The receiver gain is controlled between 0 and 100% max. gain and allows for 55 dB of gain and is programmable without stopping data collection. The CW Doppler has a PCI interface that acts as a bus master. An interrupt is generated via the PCI Interface to the Host PC when the defined number of data samples has been acquired in the Block Buffer. The contents of the Block Buffer is DMA'd into Host PC memory.

5-24-1

Internal CW Doppler Cable The internal CW Doppler Cable connects between the PCI CW Doppler PWA to a LEMO brand connector on the LOGIQ9 chassis. The Probe cable has the following pin assignments: P1

J1

Conductor

Signal

1

2

Coax Center, red jacket

DOPIN

2

3

Coax shield, Red jacket.

DOPIN GND

4

5

W3

ID0

6

6

Coax center, wht jacket

PCW

5

7

Coax shield, Wht jacket.

PCW GND

3

8

W5

ID1

10

W1,W2 shield

HW1

W1,W2 shield

Shell

5-24-2

Probe Connector The two probes connect to the system via a LEMO connector: FFA.3S.310.CLAC11. with pin connections provided below. A Resistor, R1, must be installed as an identifier for the probe type: •

5 MHz - 75 K ohm

•

8 MHz - 25 K ohm Lemo

Conductor

Signal

2

Coax Center, red jacket

DOPIN

3

Coax shield, Red jacket.

DOPIN GND

5

R1-2

ID0

6

Coax center, wht jacket

PCW

7

Coax shield, Wht jacket.

PCW GND

8

R1-1

ID1

10

Outer shield

Shell

Outer shield

Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

5-97

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER5.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

5-24-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Mu Metal Shield Mu metal shield is used to block flux field from the L9 isolation transformer mounted below the BEP.

5-98

Section 5-24 - PCI CW Doppler PWA card

P R E L I M I N A R Y

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments Section 6-1 Overview 6-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 6 This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified personnel.

Table 6-1

Chapter 6 Contents

Section

Description

Page Number

6-1

Overview

6-1

6-2

Regulatory

6-1

6-3

Monitor

6-2

6-4

Panel Calibration

6-8

6-5

Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

6-8

6-6

Brake Arm Adjustment

6-13

6-7

Brake Adjustment

6-15

. CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.

NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9

TAG

&

LOCKOUT Signed

Date

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: 1. Turn off the breaker. 2. Unplug the system. 3. Maintain control of the system power plug. 4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.

Section 6-2 Regulatory Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented. Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-3 Monitor NOTE:

After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system. Contrast, brightness and degauss are adjusted using the three (3) keys located on the front of the monitor just below the screen.

DECREASE

MENU

INCREASE DECREASE

DECREASE

MENU

MENU

INCREASE

INCREASE

Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment Switches: CRT (left), 17” LCD option (center), and 19” LCD (right)

6-3-1 6-3-1-1

Monitor Adjustment (Standard only) Degauss Degaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct this problem. To activate the manual degauss: 1.) Press either the > monitor adjustment button while the brightness/contrast adjustment indicator is not displayed on the monitor. To cancel the manual degauss, press the > adjustment button again. 2.) Press the toggle button for brightness and contrast. 3.) Press either the > monitor adjustment.

NOTE:

6-2

The monitor automatically degausses at power on.

Section 6-3 - Monitor

P R E L I M I N A R Y

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 6-3-1-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Brightness and Contrast Table 6-2

Brightness and Contrast - Standard Room Condition

Contrast

Brightness

Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology

85

35

Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology

90

55

Bright Room

100

100

To calibrate CRT brightness and contrast, go to Utility -> Test Patterns -> Brightness Calibration. The screen display will change as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 . Record any changes to the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information with the system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s). Follow the instructions on the screen. Press the menu button (middle) to adjust the Contrast to 50. Press the menu button again and adjust the Brightness to 100. Decrease the Brightness setting until the inner gray is the same shade as the black box that surrounds it. This brightness setting should range between 35 to 55. Final adjustment relies on customer approval. Cameras and printers may need to be adjusted to match any monitor changes.

Figure 6-2 Monitor Brightness/Contrast Calibration Test Pattern - Standard

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 6-3-1-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Visible Image Display Adjustment If you get a monitor where the image is smaller than the physical CRT displayed area, in other words the image does not fill the screen, you can adjust the size of the visible image display: 1.) Press and HOLD the center button "brightness/contrast (icons)" for about 10 seconds or so, you'll then see an expanded menu. This will allow you to adjust parameters like Color, Size/Center, Geometry, etc. and Utility.

NOTE:

It is recommended that only the image size be adjusted as required and not anything else. 2.) Press the Left or Right Arrow buttons to highlight Size/Center then Press the Center button. 3.) Use the Center button to select H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size. 4.) Use the Left or Right Arrows to adjust H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size parameters. 5.) When complete use the Center button to select Exit and press the Left or Right arrow buttons 6.) Use the Left or Right Arrow buttons to select Exit and press the Center button to exit the main menu.

6-3-2

Monitor Tilt (Standard) The monitor is capable of a full 10° forward and backward tilt. Although the default setting of the tilt tension on the monitor should be adequate to tilt the monitor for your viewing preference, it can be easily adjusted. The monitor chassis is attached to the monitor mount plate that has a shaft that inserts into the top plate of the scanner. This feature allows the monitor to swivel without need for adjustment. The monitor mount plate has two points for adjustment.

6-3-2-1

Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure Passing through the monitor mount plate on its underside is a large bolt, with a locking nut on its left side, that provides the tension for monitor tilt. Adjust the tilt tension by loosening or tightening the locking nut on this bolt.

NOTE: 6-3-2-2

The right side of this bolt will receive an Allen wrench to provide resistance when loosening and tightening the locking nut. Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure At the back of the monitor mount plate is a nut securing a bolt passing through the shaft. This bolt has a tapered end and several spring washers that when seated into the cylinder provides a proper counterbalance for the monitor.

6-3-2-3

Tools Phillips screwdriver Open-ended wrenches

6-3-2-4

Manpower 1 person, 1 hour + travel or 2 people, 1 hour + travel if the monitor needs to be removed.

6-4

Section 6-3 - Monitor

P R E L I M I N A R Y

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 6-3-2-5

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Procedure 1.) Raise the Control Panel to a height that allows you to work underneath the monitor. 2.) Remove the eight (8) Phillips screws holding the Under Shelf Cover to the Shelf Cover Assembly. 3.) Remove four (4) Phillips screws holding the monitor Rear Cover Assembly to the monitor chassis. 4.) You now have access the monitor tilt and counter-balance adjustments. Adjust accordingly. 5.) Install the monitor rear cover assembly to the monitor chassis. 6.) Position the shelf cover assembly and secure it in place with the Under Shelf Cover and the eight Phillips screws. Monitor Mount Plate

Tilt Adjustment Bolt

Counter-balance Adjustment Bolt

Figure 6-3 Monitor Tilt Tension Adjustment

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

6-3-3 6-3-3-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only) Brightness and Contrast Table 6-3

Brightness and Contrast - 17” LCD Room Condition

Contrast

Brightness

Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology

90

55

Bright Room

100

100

Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology

NOTE: 6-3-3-2

On the 17” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast. Angularity Test Pattern An Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image. Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/ Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.

Figure 6-4 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 17” LCD 6-3-3-3

Color Settings Table 6-4

6-6

Color Settings - 17” LCD

Temperature

Gamma

Saturation

Hue

15000K

2.6

0

0

Section 6-3 - Monitor

P R E L I M I N A R Y

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

6-3-4 6-3-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only) Brightness and Contrast Table 6-5

Brightness and Contrast - 19” LCD Room Condition

Contrast

Brightness

Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology

95

60

Bright Room

100

100

Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology

NOTE: 6-3-4-2

On the 19” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast. Angularity Test Pattern An Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image. Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/ Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.

Figure 6-5 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 19”LCD 6-3-4-3

Color Settings Table 6-6

Color Settings - 19” LCD

Temperature

Gamma

Saturation

Hue

13000K

2.2

0

0

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-4 Panel Calibration The Touch Panel Adjustment/Calibration procedure can be found in Section 7-6-1-1 “Calibration Utilities” on page 7-23.

Section 6-5 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment The operator panel can move up and down (Z direction). A gas spring in the scanner provides a counter force to "balance" the weight of the operator panel and allows for positioning with minimal effort. A lever on the main handle has a cable (similar to a bicycle cable) that provides the release for the gas spring. This cable has one end attached to the release lever and the other end attached to the mechanism on the gas spring piston.

6-5-1

Time Required Approximately 1 person for 1 hour plus travel.

6-5-2

Tools Phillips screwdriver 10mm open-end wrench Two (2) small slotted screwdrivers Needle-nose pliers Small ruler Large slotted screwdriver 3mm Allen wrench

6-5-3 DANGER

Preparations DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. COMPLETELY POWER OFF AND SHUTDOWN THE SCANNER BEFORE SERVICING. 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.

6-8

Section 6-4 - Panel Calibration

P R E L I M I N A R Y

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

6-5-4

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Z-Release Cable Adjustment

CAUTION Before making any adjustments, check the Z-release system to determine what adjustments

need to be made.

6-5-4-1

Checking the Release System 1.) Squeeze the Z-release lever and move the operator panel to its highest position. If this is not possible, perform the necessary steps in Emergency Release Procedure on page 6-12. 2.) Place a small ruler next to the Z-release lever as shown in the Figure 6-6 below. 3.) Gently wiggle the Z-release lever and measure the amount of play in the lever. 4.) If this amount is 3mm or more, there is too much play in the cable. Perform the steps in the section Z-Release Cable Adjustment on page 6-9 to reduce the amount of play in the cable. 5.) Attempt to lower the operator panel by pushing down on it. The operator panel should not move. While continuing to push down, slowly squeeze the Z-release lever. 6.) Note the position of the Z-release lever when the operator panel starts to move. It should be 1/4 to 2/3 of the lever’s range of motion.

Z-Release Lever

Figure 6-6 Z-Release Measurement

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 6-5-4-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Cable Adjustment 1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw in the cable adjustment screw to tighten the Z-release cable. 2.) If you cannot remove enough of the play in the cable using this adjustment, see Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring on page 6-10

Underside of Z-Release Lever Z-Release Cable Cable Adjustment Screw

Underside of Screw Head Halfway Between Casting and Un-squeezed Lever

Figure 6-7 Z-Release Cable Adjustment Screw

6-5-5 6-5-5-1

Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring Preparations 1.) If not already performed, Power Off / Shutdown the scanner. 2.) Remove the right- and left-side covers of the scanner . 3.) Remove the front cover of the scanner . 4.) Remove the black-and-white printer. 5.) Remove the VCR.

NOTE:

6-10

The height of the printer and VCR make them difficult to remove without first removing the front cover.

Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 6-5-5-2

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Procedure

NOTE:

The operator panel must be at or near its highest position. 1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw out the cable adjustment screw so the underside of the screw head is about half way between the casting and the unsqueezed lever. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-10 . 2.) There is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Refer to Figure 6-8. Using 2 slotted screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp.

Cable End Wire Clamp

Forked Retainer

Figure 6-8 Gas Spring Mechanism 3.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the cable end which is above the clamp and pull upward to take up any cable slack. 4.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp down along the cable so that it is nestled back in the Forked Retainer. WARNING

Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the forked retainer. If one of the tines should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced at the factory. 5.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp. 6.) Without squeezing the release lever, check that the forked retainer is in its fully up position. 7.) Squeeze the release lever and watch the forked retainer move down immediately as the lever is squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or slackened) with the cable adjustment screw per step 1.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

6-5-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Emergency Release Procedure When the operator panel is at or near its highest position it is possible to see the gas spring mechanism with the Black and White Printer or the VCR removed. If the operator panel is stuck in the down position, it is not possible to see the gas spring mechanism as it is down behind the card rack. To avoid removing the Card Rack to make adjustments, try this procedure to raise the operator panel. 1.) Using 3mm Allen Wrench, remove the shoulder bolt holding the release lever on the handle. 2.) Tilt the release lever down and pull on the cable as shown in the figure below. This will give unlimited travel and hopefully release the gas spring. Push up on the operator panel while you are pulling on the cable.

CAUTION Do NOT use excessive force!

Figure 6-9 Release Lever 3.) If you have no cable to pull (cable broken) or you are unable to release the gas spring in this manner, you must remove the Card Rack to gain access to the gas spring mechanism.

6-5-7

Procedure Completion 1.) Install the VCR. 2.) Install the Black-and-White printer. 3.) Replace the front cover . 4.) Replace the side covers. 5.) If required, Power On / Bootup the scanner.

6-12

Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-6 Brake Arm Adjustment Adjustments to the brake arm may be necessary if the pedals do not depress readily nor engage so the front wheels lock in place and do not swivel.

6-6-1

Tools Flat-head screwdriver

6-6-2

Manpower One person, 1 hour + travel

6-6-3

Preparations 1.) Remove the front bumper. TOP VIEW

Front Brake Arm Adjustment Nuts

Swivel Lock Pedal / Brake Pedal Release

Brake Pedal / Swivel Lock Release Brake Arm Adjustment Rod Figure 6-10 Brake Adjustment

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

6-6-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure To adjust the brake arm it is recommended to separate both front adjustment nuts from the brake assembly.

Adjustment Nuts

Brake Clamp

Brake Assembly

Retaining Nuts Screwdriver

Figure 6-11 Front Adjustment Hardware 2.) Remove the brake clamps that are inserted through a small hole in the front adjustment nuts and slipped over the nut at its collar. 3.) Loosen the front retaining nuts to allow room for adjustments. 4.) With a screwdriver you can pry the front adjustment nuts away from their connectors in the brake assembly. 5.) Set the main brake - the brake assembly should be pulled to the left. 6.) Seat the right adjustment rod into the right adjustment nut under the right front wheel as far as it will go. 7.) Seat the right front adjustment nut onto the adjustment rod as far as it will go. 8.) In order to insure that the same length of adjustment rod is seated into the two adjustment nuts you will turn the adjustment rod one turn out of the rear adjustment nut under the front wheel and turn the front adjustment nut off the adjustment rod a similar turn. 9.) Repeat this alternating rotation until the front adjustment nut lines up easily with the connector in the brake assembly. 10.)Push the adjustment nut onto the brake assembly connector and secure the retaining nut tight against the adjustment nut. NOTE:

6-6-5

Repeat the same procedure to adjust the swivel lock. The only difference would be to set the swivel lock prior to the adjustments.

Procedure Completion 1.) Install the front bumper.

6-14

Section 6-6 - Brake Arm Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 6-7 Brake Adjustment 6-7-1

Front Wheel Brakes Service adjustment to the front brakes involve setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below.

6-7-1-1

Tools Allen Wrenches

6-7-1-2

Manpower One person, 1 hour + travel

6-7-1-3

Preparations 1.) Set the rear brakes to prevent the scanner from rolling. 2.) Remove the front bumper.

6-7-1-4

Front Brake Adjustment Procedure

Adjustment Hole

Allen Wrench to Adjust Brake

Wheel Brake Figure 6-12 Front Brake Adjustment 1.) Refer to Figure 6-12. Use the Allen wrench to add more pressure in order to get more braking action. 2.) If the brakes are too tight, loosen the adjustment with the Allen wrench. 3.) Check the brakes and readjust as necessary before replacing the front bumper.

Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

6-7-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment Service adjustment to the rear brakes involves setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below to remove the rear wheel and adjust the brake.

WARNING

PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE FLOATING KEYBOARD IS LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED AND THE SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE LOCKED POSITION.

WARNING

USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING SCANNER. ELEVATING SCANNER WILL MAKE IT UNSTABLE WHICH COULD CAUSE THE SCANNER TO TIP OVER.

6-7-2-1

Tools Bottle Jack Allen Wrenches

6-7-2-2

Manpower One person, 1 hour + travel

6-7-2-3

Preparations 1.) Remove the left- and right-side covers. 2.) Remove the upper rear cover. 3.) Remove the lower rear cover.

6-16

Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y

GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

6-7-2

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment (cont’d)

2 screws removed from top

Area on either side of bottom shield used to elevate scanner and remove rear wheel.

Rear Brake Set / Release Handle

Brake

2 screws removed from underside

Figure 6-13 Rear Brake Adjustment 6-7-2-4

Rear Wheel Removal Procedure 4.) Elevate the scanner by placing the bottle jack on the back frame on the side of the bottom shield of the wheel you will be removing. You can also use a block of wood as a lever to raise the scanner and place a second block of wood under the chassis to support the rear wheel off of the ground. 5.) Remove the four screws and remove the wheel from the scanner. 6.) Use an allen wrench to adjust the brake so it will properly “bite” and release the rear tire.

Figure 6-14 Rear Brake Adjustment 6-7-2-5

Rear Wheel Installation Procedure 1.) After adjusting the rear brake, install the rear wheel on the scanner. Hand tighten the four screws. 2.) Carefully lower the scanner and remove the bottle jack. 3.) Tighten the four screws using the weight of the scanner to provide resistance. 4.) Verify brake and scanner operation then replace all covers previously removed. Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

6-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER6.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL This page was intentionally left blank.

6-18

Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Section 7-1 Overview 7-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 7 This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level. Table 7-1

Contents in Chapter 7

Section

Description

Page Number

7-1

Overview

7-1

7-2

Service Safety Considerations

7-2

7-3

Gathering Trouble Data

7-3

7-4

Screen Captures

7-13

7-5

Diagnostics

7-18

7-6

Acquisition Diagnostics

7-19

7-7

I/O Devices

7-24

7-8

Common Diagnostics

7-30

7-9

Utilities

7-33

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-2 Service Safety Considerations

7-2

DANGER

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

WARNING

IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.

WARNING

IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.

WARNING

Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.

Section 7-2 - Service Safety Considerations

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-3 Gathering Trouble Data 7-3-1

Overview There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.

7-3-2

Collecting Vital System Information The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer: -

Product Name = LOGIQ™ 9

From the Utility>System>About screen: Applications Software -

Software Version

-

Software Part Number

System Base Image Software -

Base Image Revision

-

Image Part Number

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs If the system malfunctions, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This Alt-D function is available at all times, and collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and the following logs:

NOTE:

•

Keyboard Shadow Log

•

Error Logs

•

Crash Log

•

Vital Product Data

•

DICOM Logs (Beginning with R3.x.x S/W)

•

Windows Event Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)

•

Windows Modem Log (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)

•

Diagnostic Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)

•

Service Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)

Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ 9.

Example of R2.x.x screen

Example of R3.x.x and after screen Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box

When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box opens. Enter the following information: •

System ID serial number.

•

Software version.

•

Date and time of occurrence.

•

Sequence of events leading to issue.

•

Is the issue repeatable?

•

Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.

•

Media brand, speed, capacity, type.

•

Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop. -

7-4

A choice to store to a pre-formatted MOD (H: drive), CD-RW, USB memory stick, or to the Export directory D: drive (for remote viewing through InSite). Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs (cont’d)

NOTE:

Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.

NOTE:

The USB memory stick option is only available in R4.0.x and after. To save to a USB memory stick you must insert the stick in the lower front of the console , prior to starting Alt-D, then the memory stick will appear as a destination. Do not attach the memory stick in the Wired Microphone port on the control panel.

NOTE:

You MUST select H: or CD-RW as the destination device, otherwise the data is written to the default Export directory on the hard drive. The EXPORT directory is only used for InSite. It is not intended for FEs or Customer use; therefore, choose the H: drive which is the MOD or choose the CD-RW.

NOTE:

NOTE: If writing to a CD be sure that it is preformatted. The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression. Double check the CD or MOD that you made to ensure it contains at least two files. An example is shown in Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image & Logs File

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer A sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it. 1.) Access the Windows Desktop using the service dongleFrom the Start menu, select Programs > Distinct > Network Monitor. The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens (Figure 7-3).

Figure 7-3 Distinct Network Monitor screen 2.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen (Figure 7-3), select CONFIGURE. The Configuration screen opens.

Figure 7-4 Configuration screen

7-6

Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-4 NOTE:

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d) Steps 3 - 9 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this system’s network activity. If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will capture all network activity, not just this system’s. 3.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-5), select the Filters tab > New Filter. Confirm “built-in templates” is selected, and select CREATE. The Select Filter Task screen opens (Figure 7-6). .

Figure 7-5 Configuration - Filters tab

Figure 7-6 Select Filter Task screen

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d) 4.) On the Select Filter Task screen (Figure 7-6), select “Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more IP addresses”, then select NEXT. The Enter Filter Settings screen opens (Figure 7-7).

Figure 7-7 Enter Filter Settings 5.) On the Enter Filter Settings screen, enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the ADD button (Figure 7-7). Repeat this step for all IP addresses you wish to add, then select FINISH. The Enter Filter Settings screen closes. 6.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-8).

7-8

Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d) 7.) In the Filter to Apply field, select “My Computer”.

Figure 7-8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen 8.) Select CLOSE. The Configuration screen closes. 9.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play). NOTE:

The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop. 10.)Double-click on the Go Mushashi icon to start the system application. 11.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS, etc.). Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d) 12.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager. On BT07 systems and later, select Exit to close the application and return to Windows. Then open Windows Task Manager to open the Distinct Network Monitor screen.

Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen 13.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button. The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.

7-10

Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d) 14.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-3), select Capture > Stop. After stopping the data collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-10 opens.

Figure 7-10 Capture Data sample 15.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name “D:\log\Sniffer\MyLog “. 16.)Select SAVE.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d) 17.)On the Save As Capture File Dialog (Figure 7-11), select SAVE.

Figure 7-11 Save As Capture File 18.)Check the D:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files: MyLog.cap, MyLog.num. 19.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.

7-12

Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-4 Screen Captures There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key. The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P4 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps: 1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print4 button. 2.) Set the Print4 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture. 3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive, MOD, CD-R, DVD-R or USB Memory Stick. 4.) Restore the Print4 button to it’s original settings.

7-4-1

Check and Record the P4 Key Function Check the function of the Print 4 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings. 1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel. 2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu. 3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen. 4.) In the Button field, select Print4. The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-12 on page 7-13 .

Figure 7-12 Buttons Set Up Screen

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Check and Record the P4 Key Function (cont’d) P4 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-12, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings. 5.) In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. The destinations list displays the following information: *

Name: user defined during service configuration

*

Type: the type of service

*

Server: the device for which the service was configured

*

Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)

6.) In the Image generated section, record the parameters related to the service.

7-4-2

Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture If the P4 Key is not set to screen capture: 1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section. 2.) From the drop down menu select CopyToWflow_01>Image to Buffer>MyComputer>Out. 3.) Ensure that the Image generated section for capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary Capture and No Image Compression. 4.) The P4 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image buffer (clipboard).

7-14

Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-4-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing a Screen The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner: 1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured. 2.) Press P4. This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom of the scan image display.

Menu

Clipboard Thumbnails

Figure 7-13 Select Image to Capture 3.) Select SCAN from the touch panel to view the image screen and the snapshots displayed on the bottom. 4.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive, MOD or CD-R. 5.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS.

Save As

Figure 7-14 Menu > Save As

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-4-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Capturing a Screen (cont’d)

Figure 7-15 Save Dialog Box 6.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the image on the hard disk, MOD or CD-R.

7-4-4

Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality If the customer had programmed the P4 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in 7-4-1 on page 7-13. Refer to Figure 7-12. 1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel. 2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu. 3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen. 4.) In the Button field, select Print4. 5.) In the Destinations section, select the service(s) recorded in step 5, Section 7-4-1. The destinations list displays the following information:

NOTE:

*

Name: user defined during service configuration

*

Type: the type of service

*

Server: the device for which the service was configured

*

Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)

Only output services can be associated to the print keys. 6.) In the Image generated section, select the parameters related to the service recorded in step 6, Section 7-4-1.

7-16

Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-4-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut Starting with R4.x.x software, a Ctrl-PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image displayed on the system. Images captured using this shortcut are saved in the D:\export directory using both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw DICOM (.dcm) formats.

7-4-5-1

To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut 1.) With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc keys simultaneously. 2.) From the touchpanel, select Utilities -> Service -> Scanner Utilities -> Image, Compress, and Delete Utilities. 3.) Enter a checkmark in the checkbox next to the image(s) to save in the D:\export directory. 4.) Select Compress File. A compressed file of the images is stored in d:\export. You may rely on the date and time of the Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent image recorded. The uncompressed files are stored in d:\export\service\image.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-5 Diagnostics NOTE:

Detach probes and reboot system after performing any diagnostics. As described in Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory), the service platform uses a webbased user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components. The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Acquisition Diagnostics, I/O Devices and Common Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests.

Figure 7-16 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen

7-18

Section 7-5 - Diagnostics

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-6 Acquisition Diagnostics NOTE:

After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system. Acquisition Diagnostics is one of three main headings under the GSUI Diagnostics Tab.

Figure 7-17 Customer Acquisition Diagnostics Individual selections run diagnostics and return status information identifying any problems. When you select a test to run, the display changes as shown. 1.) Instructions Frame -

Displays either a test-specific text or the default instructions.

2.) Status Frame -

Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts, the frame displays the “current” status of all test results.

-

The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and Operator Feedback.

3.) Execute Button -

This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:

-

Execute - to start the diagnostic

-

Abort - to stop a diagnostic

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 7-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Acquisition Diagnostics (cont’d) 4.) Loop Count -

This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the switch is configured as an “execute” switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.

5.) Progress Indicator -

Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.

6.) Short Text Message -

Displays brief messages about the test’s progress during execution.

7.) Status Frame Background Color

7-20

-

Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to indicate completion status.

-

Code Status Fail = Red

-

Code Status Pass = Green

-

Code Status neither Pass nor Fail (Example: Aborted) = Gray (default color).

Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-6-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Diagnostic Listings Table 7-2

Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing

Diagnostic/Utility SCB PCI Interface Diag SCB Memory Diag SCB DSP Diag SCB Scan Bus Diag SCB Image Port Diag BMP PCI Interface Diag BMP Memory Diag

Function Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the SCB via the secondary PCI bus Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. Tests the Scan Sequencer’s DSP and associated components. Tests the local Scan Bus and the associated system timing. Tests the Image Port’s functionality. Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the BMP via the PCI bus. Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.

BMP Signal Path Diag

Tests the entire BMP signal path.

EQ PCI Interface Diag

Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the registers and memory on the EQ via the PCI bus.

EQ Memory Diag EQ Signal Path Diag TD Memory Diag TD Analog Reference Diag

Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers. Tests the entire EQ signal path. Tests all of the on-board memory, for all installed TD boards, including registers. Tests the AD_REF and VREF voltages on the TD.

Comprehensive Signal Path Diag

Tests the signal path of every channel from the TD Rigel Transmitter Memories to the SCB, via both the EQ and the BMP.

TD Access Diag

Tests all of the Access Modes utilized for Host/TD communication as well as Channel RAM to Rigel transfers.

Analog TGC Diag

Tests the generation of the analog TGC voltage.

XDIF Interface Diag

Tests all of the XDIF functionality that is testable without a probe or probe simulator attached to the system, including the IIC communication.

Power Supply Diag

Tests the system voltages available on the EQ.

Temperature Diag

Tests the temperature of the system, wherever available.

Noise Floor Diag Loopback Diag

Measures the noise floor of the system. The noise floor will be calculated form IQ data received without a signal source. Tests the analog front-end of the system.

Acquisition Hardware Information Utility Writes a file for each Acquisition Hardware FRU containing all Vital Product Data. Transmit Utility - Start Transmit Utility - Change Channel Transmit Utility - Stop Receive Utility - Single Frame

Receives signal on one channel at a time.

Receive Utility - 8 Frames Visual Channel Utility High Voltage Reset Utility Set VRF Utility

Tests whether all TD boards can detect a high voltage fault. Set the analog VREF to a specified value.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 7-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing (Continued)

Diagnostic/Utility Set TGC Utility

Function Set the analog TGC to a specified value.

Probe Select Utility Probe ID Read Utility Touchscreen Calibration Utility. Start Touchscreen Verification Utility. Front-End Calibration Utility System Restart

Select a probe connector to be active. Read the Probe ID of all installed probes. Calibrates the Touch Screen. Helps verify the touchscreen calibration. Measures the Front End DC Offset, Gain, and Phase. Test system restart

System Shutdown.

Tests system shutdown.

OP Panel Interface

Tests the OP Panel interface.

System Power Button Test

Tests the system Power Button.

IIC PCI-DGVIC Diag

Tests the IIC slave devices on the PCI-DGVIC board

IIC IIO Diag

Tests the IIC slave devices on the Internal IO board.

IIC EIO Diag

Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.

IIC EIO Upper Diag

Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.

PC2IP IIC Troubleshooting Procedure Procedure featured with tests that guides and helps you to troubleshoot PC2IP IIC Step1 through 5 failures. Footswitch Test Utility PC Diagnostics Interactive tests PC Diagnostics Non-Interactive tests

NOTE:

Tests the system Power Button. Tests std PC components (CPU, Hard Drive, Memory, CD/DVD drives) automatically. Tests standard PC components (keyboard, audio, monitor) non- interactively.

In R4.x software and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed.

.

7-22

DANGER

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

WARNING

IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.

WARNING

IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.

WARNING

Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.

Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 7-6-1-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Calibration Utilities Touchscreen Calibration: Follow the directions on the Touchscreen. As each of the cross-hairs appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser. You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair until it moves to the next location. If you just tap the calibration cross-hair, there is a better than average chance your calibration will be corrupt.

NOTE:

Do NOT use sharp, pointed objects to press on the Touchscreen. You should also be careful if you have long, sharp finger nails. The Touchscreen can be damaged by sharp objects. After all the cross-hairs are touched the screen is calibrated. Start/Stop Touchscreen Verification: Select START TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE. The Start Touchscreen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small red dots appears. To terminate the verification, select STOP TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE. Front-End Calibration Utility - DC Offset: All probes must be disconnected. Measures the DC offset of each channel and writes a calibration file for use in zeroing the offset. Application code may utilize these values to zero each channel's DC offset, by programming the Rigel beam forming ASIC's on TD's.

NOTE:

In R4.x and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed. Do not run this diagnostic test in previous versions of software.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-7 I/O Devices lThe Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program (GE Test App) available through the Service Platform. 7-7-0-1

Launching the Op Panel Test 1.) Log onto the Service Platform, and select the Diagnostics tab. 2.) Locate the Op Panel Test under I/O Devices > Op Panel Utilities > Op Panel Interface. 3.) Select Start to launch the GE Test App. An hour glass displays on the Service Platform window. The GE Test App window is hidden behind the Service Platform window. 4.) When the hour glass displays, minimize the Service Platform window to reveal the GE Test App window. See Figure 7-18. a.) To minimize, move the cursor to the “-” minus icon at upper right hand corner of the window. b.) Press the Set key.

Figure 7-18 Select System Type 5.) On the Startup tab, select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test interface. The other buttons on the Startup tab will now be active. See Figure 7-19.

7-24

Section 7-7 - I/O Devices

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-6-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Diagnostic Listings (cont’d)

Detach and Other Buttons Active

Attach Button Active

Figure 7-19 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab 6.) Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel.

7-7-1

Trackball Tab Test the trackball functionality by moving the pointer over the blue box. See Figure 7-20. Verify that the X and Y position are updated as the pointer is moved. Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel. Verify that the corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-20 Trackball Tab

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-7-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Keyboard Tab Test the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard. Verify that the corresponding key is highlighted when each key is pressed. See Figure 7-21.

NOTE:

The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed.

Figure 7-21 Keyboard Tab

7-7-3

Slidepots Tab Test the slidepot (TGC) functionality by moving each slidepot through its range. See Figure 7-22. Verify that the visual and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved. Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons. See Figure 7-22. Visually verify the LED functionality on the upper operator panel.

Figure 7-22 Slidepots Tab

7-26

Section 7-7 - I/O Devices

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-7-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Encoders Tab Test the encoder functionality by rotating each encoder knob. See Figure 7-23. Verify that the position is updated as the encoder is moved. Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel. Verify that the corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed. See Figure 7-23.

Figure 7-23 Encoders Tab

7-7-5

Pushbuttons Tab Test the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel. Verify that the corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-24.

Figure 7-24 Pushbuttons Tab

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-7-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

LEDs Tab Test the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App. See Figure 7-25. Verify that the corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected.

Figure 7-25 LEDs Tab

7-7-7

Touchscreen Tab Test the touchscreen functionality by pressing on the touch screen of the upper operator panel. Verify that the press is indicated in the black window by a highlighted circle. See Figure 7-26.

Figure 7-26 Touchscreen Tab

7-28

Section 7-7 - I/O Devices

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-7-8

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Ending the Program 1.) When you have finished testing the Op Panel, close the GE Test App. 2.) In the Service Platform window, click on the Stop button. 3.) Close the Service Platform window. 4.) Shutdown the system and reboot.

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-8 Common Diagnostics Common Diagnostics is the second main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics. Figure 7-27 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below.

Figure 7-27 Common Diagnostics

7-8-1

Utilities Provides two selections:

7-8-1-1

Disruptive Mode Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting.

7-8-1-2

System Shutdown Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System. Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not. After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel the request.

7-30

Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-8-2 7-8-2-1

7-8-2-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

PC Diagnostics Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier •

CPU Test

•

Hard Drive Tests

•

Memory Tests

•

CD/DVD Drive Tests (BEP3.x only)

•

Video Test

•

USB Test

•

PCI Board Configuration Test

•

SCSI Device Test (This test normally fails since the Logiq 9 does not have any SCSI device)

•

AGP Video Card Test (This test is aborted, n/a for L9 BT04 or earlier)

•

Network Test

Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09 •

Essential Tests (PCI bus, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Hard drive status and Random seek, Network interface loopback only). It runs some of the tests below.

•

System board (it tests PCI Bus communication, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Parallel Port and Network Interface loopback only)

•

Hard disk surface (over an hour, tests Drive status, Random seek, Surface scan test)

•

Hard disk quick test (takes about 6 min)

•

PCI Bus

•

Video card (it takes about 6 min)

•

Network interface (system needs to be connected to the network)

•

CMOS

•

DRAM memory

•

Parallel port

Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-8-3

PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) •

7-32

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Audio Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)

•

Keyboard Test

•

Midi - LOGIQ™ 9 does not support MIDI channels. If you try and run the MIDI test, the test may fail (Not available in BT04, BT06, BT07, or BT09)

•

Monitor Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)

Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 7-9 Utilities 7-9-1

Dicom Verify Utility This utility provides an easy way to verify DICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices on the network. See Figure 7-28.

NOTE:

To monitor possible network issues for BT06 and later systems, the Dicom Verify Utility can be placed in a loop to run continuously until turned off. The BT06 Dicom Verify Utility screen has a checkbox at the bottom to enable the continuous loop.

Figure 7-28 Dicom Verify Utility - BT04

Figure 7-29 Dicom Verify Utility - BT06 or Later 1.) Enter the AE Title, IP Address, and Port Number for the DICOM device. 2.) Click on the Verify button. Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

7-33

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER7.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

7-9-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Dicom Verify Utility (cont’d) 3.) Examine the utility error output. See Figure 7-30 for an example.

Figure 7-30 Example Error Messages

7-9-1-1

•

In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.

•

In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.

•

In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.

Hard Drive Failure The symptoms of hard drive failures are as follows: •

The results of hard drive diagnostics may indicate bad sectors on the hard drive.

•

The system may not boot because of bad sectors on the hard drive.

•

Attempts to re-image the C: partition may fail because of bad sectors on the C: partition.

•

The system may not boot and displays blue screen stop errors (dark blue screen with white text “blue screen of death”).

In the event of a hard drive failure, determine whether or not the customer requires recovery of data. If the customer requires data recovery, collect the following information from the customer: •

Customer contact name

•

Customer contact phone

•

Customer contact address

•

What data they require (e.g. studies for a date range or everything)

•

Whether the customer wants their data on CD or DVD media

Tell the customer GE will attempt to recover as much data as possible. Write a complaint and include the above information, and do not discard or return the failed hard drive. A member of the Complaint Handling Unit or the Installed Base team will contact the author of the complaint and provide instructions for delivery of the failed hard drive to engineering. Engineering will then recover as much data as possible and send the recovered data directly to the customer.

7-34

Section 7-9 - Utilities

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures Section 8-1 Overview 8-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 8 This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems. Follow all safety precautions while servicing and repairing this equipment.

Table 8-1

Chapter 8 Contents

Section

Description

Page Number

8-1

Overview

8-1

8-2

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1

8-4

8-3

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2

8-7

8-4

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5

8-10

8-5

Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x

8-13

8-6

Before Starting a Software Load

8-17

8-7

Image Management Guide

8-18

8-8

Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior

8-26

8-9

Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

8-33

8-10

Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later

8-38

8-11

Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

8-44

8-12

Loading Application Software - R6.x.x

8-49

8-13

Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later

8-56

8-14

Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

8-61

8-15

System Setup

8-65

8-16

Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

8-70

8-17

Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

8-72

8-18

Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

8-74

8-19

Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure

8-86

8-20

Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

8-92

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-1-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back

Left

Front

Rear

Figure 8-1 Console Views

8-2

Section 8-1 - Overview

Right

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-1-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances. GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.

NOTE:

The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.

WARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL

PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional. In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

WARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard

drive, given that the hard drive is still functional. In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

WARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL

PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional. In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

WARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard

drive, given that the hard drive is still functional. In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-2 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1 8-2-1

Manpower One person, .5 hour + travel

8-2-2

Tools Phillips screwdriver

8-2-3

Preparations We anticipate, with the exception of a failure, batteries will only need to be replaced once every three years. 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system. 2.) Remove the left-side cover.

8-2-4

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor. 2.) Remove the four screws from the power supply battery pack cover plate. 3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire. 4.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.

1

3

2

4

Figure 8-2 Removing / Installing the Power Supply Battery Pack

8-4

Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-2-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 Heat-shrink holds batteries together and insulates terminals.

In Line 20A Fuse Label to be attached to this surface

+

Spacer seperates batteries

-

Battery 1

-

+

Battery 2

Compression tape used to minimize battery pack movement while installed in chassis

Figure 8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack 1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor. 2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the four screws removed . 3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on. 4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery. CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the

power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury. To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.

5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed. 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-2

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-3

Standby Mode

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

Section 4-4

Peripheral Checks

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-2. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-2-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 (cont’d) The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the OFF condition. The OFF condition is: -

Circuit Breaker in the OFF position

-

System unplugged from the wall outlet

If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.

8-2-6

Battery Disposal Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.

8-6

Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2 8-3-1

Manpower One person, 15 minutes + travel

8-3-2

Tools Phillips screwdriver

8-3-3

Preparations 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system. 2.) Remove the left-side covers.

8-3-4

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor. 2.) Remove the screw from the power supply battery pack cover plate. See Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate 3.) Tip the power supply battery pack cover plate forward and lift up to remove, refer to Figure 8-5.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-3-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d)

Figure 8-5 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate Tipped Forward 4.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire. 5.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.

8-3-5

Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor. 2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the screw removed . 3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on. 4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.

CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the

power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury. To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.

5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed. 6.) Replace the left-side cover . 7.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system .

8-8

Section 8-3 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-3-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 (cont’d) 8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-3

8-3-6

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-3

Standby Mode

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

Section 4-4

Peripheral Checks

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-3. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Battery Disposal Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 8-4-1

Manpower One person, 15 minutes + travel

8-4-2

Tools Phillips screwdriver

8-4-3

Preparations 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system. 2.) Remove the left-side cover.

8-4-4

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor. 2.) Unplug the sidefan connection. Be careful not to pinch the wires when replacing cover.

Figure 8-6 BEP 3 with cover removed

8-10

Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-4-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d) 3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires. See Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Disconnect Battery Pack Connection Wires 4.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8 BEP 3.x One Power Supply Battery Pack Removed 5.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 BEP 3.x Both Power Supply Battery Packs Removed

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-4-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor. 2.) Apply Power .... turn the system on. 3.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.

CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the

power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury. To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.

4.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed. 5.) Replace the left-side cover 6.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system 7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-4

8-4-6

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-3

Standby Mode

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

Section 4-4

Peripheral Checks

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-4. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Battery Disposal Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.

8-12

Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x 8-5-1

Manpower One person, 15 minutes + travel

8-5-2

Tools Phillips screwdriver

8-5-3

Preparations 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system. 2.) Remove the left-side cover.

8-5-4

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x 1.) Remove the cover from the Back End Processor (BEP) by loosening the thumb screw on the back. 2.) Unplug the side fan.

NOTICE

Whenever accessing internal BEP components, ensure the wires are clear. Avoid pinching or damaging the wires or cables.

Figure 8-10 BEP 4.x

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-5-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d) 3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires.

Figure 8-11 Battery Pack Connection Wires 4.) Remove the 8 screws holding the battery pack bracket.

Figure 8-12 BEP 4.x

8-14

Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-5-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d) 5.) Take bracket off.

Figure 8-13 Remove Bracket 6.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor. 7.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.

Figure 8-14 Remove Battery Pack

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-5-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x 1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor. 2.) Replace the bracket. 3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on. 4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.

CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the

power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury. To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.

5.) Reattach the side fan wires. 6.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor. Be careful not to pinch the fan wires when replacing the cover. 7.) Replace the left-side cover. 8.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system. 9.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-5

8-5-6

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-3

Standby Mode

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

Section 4-4

Peripheral Checks

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-5. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Battery Disposal Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.

8-16

Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-6 Before Starting a Software Load 8-6-1

Printers Any customized print settings will be lost when the new base image is loaded prior to R6.x.x. If the customer has any on board, peripheral, or network printers, any settings they have made in the device driver, such as Gray Scale Images, will be lost. These printer settings will need to be recorded. Go to Utilities>System>Peripherals>Printers in order to record the printer settings.

8-6-2 8-6-2-1 NOTE:

Save Connectivity Settings DICOM TCPIP Settings DICOM Workflows and DICOM Device Configurations are saved when you preform the User-Defined backup procedure in Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22. If you want to Import exams back on to your system after the software load, you should record any vital DICOM data before proceeding. 1.) Select Utilities>Connectivity>TCPIP tab and record all information on that tab with particular attention to: -

The “Enable DHCP” box should NOT be checked

-

Computer Name: ______________________________

-

IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________

-

Subnet Mask: ______/________/________/________

-

Default Gateway: ______/________/________/________

-

Remote Archive IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________

-

Remote Archive Name: ______________________________________

For BT07 and later, service settings can be saved along with the user-defined configuration.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-7 Image Management Guide 8-7-1

Managing Patient Data and Presets Save to MOD, CD-R or DVD-R any patient data, images, and system presets that have been stored or configured. Installing the base operating software may delete some patient data, images and system setups saved on the system.

NOTE: 8-7-1-1

Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base operating software. Patient Images and Data EZBackup/Move Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from LOGIQ™ 9 to DVD-R, CD-R or MOD. Refer to Section 8-7-2 "EZBackup/Move" on page 8-19.

8-7-1-2

Preset Data User-Defined Backup Protocols Use this to copy User-Defined presets before doing a base image software load. Refer to Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22.

8-7-1-3

Backup Media DVD Media Requirements Only DVD-R. DO NOT use DVD-RW or DVD+R. CD-ROM Media Requirements Only use CD-R CD-ROMs, DO NOT use CD-RW CD-ROMs. Also, the CD-R CD-ROM MUST support 16x writing speed or greater. CD-ROM Handling Tips To eject the CD, always press F3. DO NOT press the eject button on the CD-ROM/DVD Drive. Always finalize the CD-ROM. This allows you to read the CD-ROM on any other PC. DO NOT finalize the CD if you want to add more images to the CD.

8-18

Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-7-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

EZBackup/Move EZBackup/Move allows you to manage hard disk space (move images off the hard drive) while maintaining the patient database on the scanner, as well as to back up the patient database and images. 1.) Specify the EZBackup/Move setup on the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page.

Figure 8-15 Utility > System > Backup/Restore Preset Menu Table 8-6

EZBackup/Move Preset Parameters

Preset Parameter

Description

Reminder Dialog Interval days

Specify the number of days after the last backup that you want the system to prompt you to perform an EZBackup/Move procedure (only for moving images).

Enable Reminder Dialog

Select to activate the EZBackup/Move reminder pop-up dialog.

Backup files older than in days

The system will backup images older than the number of days specified here. If you enter a zero (0), then all of the images from today on will be backed up.

Move files after backup

Check this box to delete images from the hard drive after the backup.

Media

Select media type.

Media capacity for estimate (MB) Specify the capacity of the backup media.

2.) To start the EZBackup/Move procedure, go to the Patient menu and select the EZBackup/Move button at the lower right-hand position of the Patient list. The EZBackup/Move Wizard starts.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-7-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

EZBackup/Move (cont’d)

Figure 8-16 New Patient EZBackup/Move Example NOTE:

EZBackup/Move can take up to 20 minutes (or longer, depending on the size of the backup). Make sure to schedule this at the same time daily, when no patients are scheduled. 3.) Verify the information on the first page of the EZBackup/Move Wizard, then press Next.

Figure 8-17 EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 1 8-20

Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-7-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

EZBackup/Move (cont’d)

NOTE:

You do not need to format the media prior to performing an EZBackup/Move.

NOTE:

EZBackup/Move cannot span a single image across two (2) or more media. Therefore, if EZBackup/Move encounters an image that is greater than the capacity of the media, it skips the oversized image.

NOTE:

EZBackup/Move does not store images to media in sequential order. Instead it maximizes the most amount of images per media. 4.) Verify the information on the EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 2. The backup may span multiple media. This page tells you how many media you need to do this backup. After you have gathered the media (allow for one extra media, just in case), you are ready to begin the backup. Press Next. 5.) A pop-up message appears that provides you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the media. Press OK. 6.) The status menu appears. When the backup/move has been completed, press Next.

NOTE:

When/if you need to insert the next media, a message appears providing you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the next media and press OK. 7.) When the backup is complete, the Backup completed page appears.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-7-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

User-Defined Backup Protocols 1.) Insert the backup media. Format the CD-R or MOD. (DVD-R do not need to be formatted.) Select the Utility tab on the Measurement Selection Menu. Select Connectivity->Tools. Label the media. A pop-up menu displays when the formatting is complete, see Figure 8-20.

Figure 8-18 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen

Figure 8-19 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen - BT04 and after 2.) Press Ok to continue. Verify that the format was successful.

8-22

Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-7-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)

Figure 8-20 Format Successful Pop-up Menu 3.) On the Touch Panel, press Utility. 4.) On the Utility Touch Panel, press System. 5.) On the monitor display, select Backup/Restore. The Backup/Restore screen opens. NOTE:

If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on with administrator privileges.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-7-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)

Figure 8-21 Backup Menu- Prior to R4.x.x

Figure 8-22 Backup / Restore Screen - R4.x.x and R6.x.x

8-24

Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-7-3 NOTE:

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d) The detailed section of this menu decouples the user defined configuration above. This allows you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines. Refer to Chapter 16 “Customizing Your System” in the Basic User Manual for more information. 6.) In the Backup list, select the items you wish to backup. 7.) In the Media field, select MOD, CD or DVD. 8.) Select Backup. 9.) Answer ‘Ok’ to the following pop-up message as many times as the number of items you are backing up. The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen.

Figure 8-23 Back-up Confirmation Message 10.)After the backup is complete, press F3 to eject the media.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-8 Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-8-1

Preparations Save Connectivity Settings as described in 8-6-2 on page 8-17.

NOTE:

Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base image software.

NOTE:

After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab -> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.

NOTE:

While it is believed to be unnecessary, it would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers.

NOTE:

Be sure all printers are connected and turned on. If a printer is plugged in at this time it will automatically install and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.

NOTE:

If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on. If the system you are loading software on has a BEP 2, please complete steps 1 - step 5 below. If the system you are loading software on has a BEP1 or BEP3, proceed to step 2 of 8-8-2 "Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-28.

NOTE:

8-8-1-1

How to differentiate BEPs easily -

If the MOD is 640M it should be BEP1.

-

If the MOD is 1.3G it should be BEP2.X.

-

There is no MOD on BEP3 and it has two USB ports.

To Prepare to Load Base Image 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.

WARNING

8-26

Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.

Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 8-8-1-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

To Prepare to Load Base Image (cont’d) 2.) Remove the left side cover. 3.) Unplug the microphone input (C11) from the BEP, see Figure 8-24 on page 8-27 . 4.) Wrap the cable end of the plug using electrical tape to isolate it from the BEP. By disconnecting the microphone input, you eliminate feedback during the software load. This input may have been unplugged previously, if so, be sure it is wrapped and leave it disconnected.

C11 Audio In

Figure 8-24 BEP2 Cable Identification 5.) Replace the left side cover.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-8-2 WARNING

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner. 1.) Turn on the scanner. 2.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, Disk 1 of 2” into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.

NOTE:

There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.

NOTE:

See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load CD version for BEP 2.x or BEP3. 3.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the On / Off switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the On / Off switch to turn amber.

Figure 8-25 Shutdown Dialog Box NOTE:

If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10. 4.) If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the Standby Switch until the light turns from green to amber.

8-28

Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-8-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d) 5.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a message displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-26 on page 8-29 .

Figure 8-26 Base Load Warning Message Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue. 6.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-8-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)

Figure 8-27 Base Load Option Screen The first choice is to load the complete hard drive. [1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost. NOTE:

APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!

Figure 8-28 Base Load Option 1 Message Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the complete base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.

8-30

Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-8-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d) The second choice is to load only the bootable portion of the hard drive partition, the “C” partition. This is not an option for a new hard drive that has not been previously partitioned for proper LOGIQ™ 9 operation. [2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is NOT lost.

NOTE:

DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON A BRAND NEW SYSTEM. IT IS INTENDED FOR RECOVERY OF A SYSTEM THAT WILL NOT BOOT UP. APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA IS PRESERVED. This selection will leave the remaining drive partitions intact.

Table 8-7

LOGIQ™ 9 Drive Partition and Usage

Drive Partition

Usage

C

System Files and Applications

D

User Define and Presets

E

Patient Archive Data

F

File Swap Area

Figure 8-29 Base Load Option 2 Message Figure 8-29 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C. The third choice, [3] Exit to the A:\ prompt. Is intended for manufacturing use only. This is NOT an option as it is intended for manufacturing use only. If you select Option 3 by mistake, power off the system. Hold down the On / Off switch until the light turns amber then turn the system back on.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-31

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-8-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d) Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1 or Option 2, you will see a screen showing Norton Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 mins). 7.) When prompted, remove Disk 1 from the CDROM/DVD drive. Insert Disk 2 and press Enter to continue.

NOTE:

There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image. A message, as shown in Figure 8-30, will be displayed when the process is complete.

Figure 8-30 Base Load Complete 8.) Remove the disk from the CD-ROM/DVD drive. NOTE:

Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System Software Load process when the system boots up. 9.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system. 10.)When the system reboots it will automatically log on to start checking hardware. This is a normal process and should be allowed to run to completion.

NOTE:

While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 3-4 minutes after the desktop is displayed.

NOTE:

Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation. 11.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select Yes. The system will come up and map the drives, then the system will reboot again automatically. After the second reboot, the system will come up into the Windows mode. 12.)If the customer has a USB (Digital Printer) to be installed, plug it in now. The system is still in Windows mode and should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver.

NOTE:

If the printer is installed while in application mode, excessive CPU time will be consumed and the system will become very slow to unusable. Shutting down and rebooting will clear the condition. The printer will function correctly. 13.)Proceed to Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44.

8-32

Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system. This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 systems (as well as systems upgraded to BT04), software version R4.x.x. NOTE:

Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.

NOTE:

After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab -> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.

NOTE:

Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.

NOTE:

Be sure all USB devices are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.

NOTE:

If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on. 1.) Turn on the scanner. 2.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed. 3.) Perform a Backup from the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page. You need to backup the Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, Voice Training, and Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed. 4.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.

WARNING

The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner 5.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, into the CDROM/DVD drive.

NOTE:

See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-33

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d) 6.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.

Figure 8-31 Shutdown Dialog Box NOTE:

If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10. 7.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber. 8.) Turn on the scanner. A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-32 on page 8-34 .

Figure 8-32 Base Load Warning Message Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue. 9.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C. 8-34

Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)

Figure 8-33 Base Load Option Screen 10.)Select [1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost. NOTE:

WARNING

YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED.

ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!

Figure 8-34 Base Load Option 1 Message 11.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-35

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d) Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).

Figure 8-35 Norton Ghost screen. A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30, is displayed when the process has completed. If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully completed. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system. Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software” load procedure.

Figure 8-36 Base Load Complete 12.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive. NOTE:

If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the system boots up. 13.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.

8-36

Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-9 NOTE:

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d) If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button. 14.)When the system reboots it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal process and should be allowed to run to completion.

NOTE:

Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.

NOTE:

While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change”dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed. 15.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).

Figure 8-37 Restart Windows Message 16.)You now need to run the Firmware executable to update the DVD/CD-ROM drives. a.) Determine the type of drive this LOGIQ 9 supports by right clicking on My Computer (left Set key) --> Manage (right Set key) --> Device Manager --> DVD/CD-ROM drives. Note the type of device. NOTE:

If the device on the LOGIQ 9 does not match any of the Firmware directories in the next step, then you do not need to run this update. b.) Go to the c:\Hardware_Drivers\Firmware\ directory (you can use Windows Explorer for this). Select the directory that matches the device supported by this LOGIQ 9 system from the previous step. c.) Run the executable for the DVD drive. Follow the directions in this executable (the instructions vary by device). 17.)If necessary, remap the DVD drive. The DVD drive should be drive G. Remap the drives by running remap.bat in c:\remap. 18.)Check your Service Dongle. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights up. You can then remove the Service Dongle. 19.)Proceed to Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-37

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later Save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after completed.

WARNING

WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA, YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system. This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT07 and later systems with software version of R7.x.x and later.

NOTE:

Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.

NOTE:

After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab -> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.

NOTE:

R7.x and later Base Image and Application software disables the following: the Run window normally accessed from Start->Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.

NOTE:

Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.

NOTE:

Be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.

NOTE:

If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on. 1.) Turn on the scanner. 2.) Turn on all digital peripherals, including the DVR. 3.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed. 4.) Record the system’s installed Option strings from the Utility --> Admin --> System Admin page. 5.) Perform a Backup from the Utility-->System-->Backup/Restore page. You should back up the Patient Archive, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration, Voice training, and Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed. 6.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive. 7.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image”, into the CDROM/DVD drive.

NOTE:

8-38

See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.

Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-10

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)

8.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.

Figure 8-38 Shutdown Dialog Box NOTE:

If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10. 9.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber. 10.)Turn on the scanner. A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-39 on page 8-39 .

Figure 8-39 Base Load Warning Message Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue. 11.)Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-39

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-10

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)

Figure 8-40 Base Load Option Screen 12.)Select either option: a.) [1] Load the complete disk -- All existing data will be lost. Or, b.) [2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is not lost. NOTE:

YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED.

You are about to reload only the C: partition. If you DO NOT want to do this, remove the CDROM from the CDROM drive and Press “CTRL-C” now to exit and power cycle your system to restart without overwriting your disk drive's current contents. Press any key to continue...

Figure 8-41 Base Load Option 2 Message 13.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.

8-40

Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-10

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)

Once you have chosen to continue with the selected option, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).

Figure 8-42 Norton Ghost screen. A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30 is displayed when the process has completed.

If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully completed. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system. Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software” load procedure. Thank you! Figure 8-43 Base Load Complete

NOTICE Do NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet.

Do NOT insert the application disc into the CD-ROM/DVD drive until you have completed all the remaining directions in this section. If you insert any media in the drive beforehand, the drives will not remap correctly.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-41

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-10

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)

14.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive. NOTE:

If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the system boots up. 15.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system. When the system reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal process. 16.)Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.

NOTE:

If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button (button turns amber).

NOTE:

Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.

NOTE:

While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now?” to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed. 17.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).

Figure 8-44 System Settings Change dialog box - Restart Windows Message After restart, the DriveUpdater dialog box and an Instructions dialog box open.

Figure 8-45 DriveUpdater (left) and Instructions Dialog Boxes

8-42

Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 8-10

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)

Figure 8-46 DriveUpdater Dialog Box 18.)If the Current Version matches the New Version, proceed to step 20. NOTE:

If completing step 19, you must complete all substeps associated with the DriveUpdater dialog box BEFORE you select OK on the Instructions dialog box. If you select the OK button on the Instructions dialog box prematurely, the system may not remap the drives correctly. 19.)If the Current Version does not match the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box: a.) Select the Update button. After firmware update is complete, the Update button changes to a Reboot button. b.) Select the Reboot button. c.) Wait for Windows to finish installing the new Driver for the upgraded firmware and to find new hardware. After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again. Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box at this time. d.) Wait for the System Settings Change dialog box to open asking “Do you want to restart you computer now?” (Figure 8-44). Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box.

NOTE:

If the 'Do you want to restart your computer now?' dialog box does not open after several minutes, select Start -> Restart to reboot and continue with step f. e.) Select Yes to restart. f.) Wait for the system to reboot. After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again. 20.)If the Current Version matches the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box: a.) Select the Exit button on DriveUpdater dialog box first. b.) Select OK in the Instructions dialog box. At this point, the CD drive re-mapping occurs. Do not reboot the system until the re-mapping is complete. After re-mapping, the CD/DVD drive should be drive G:\. When the re-mapping process is complete, the re-mapping window closes. c.) Confirm the CD\DVD drive is mapped to G:\. 21.)Proceed to 8-12-2 "Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x" on page 8-54 before loading application software R7.x.x and later.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-43

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-11 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-11-1

Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

NOTE:

If you have not done so previously, double-click on the My Computer icon. Check for the drive letters assignments of the Removable Drive (MOD) and the CD-ROM/DVD Drive. If the CD-ROM/DVD Drive is not drive “g” and the MOD drive “h” , manually remap the drives.

NOTE:

When installing R2.1.1 software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.

NOTE:

Starting with the Application S/W R3.0.0C and above, you may get a notification that the service platform is out of date. One of the last steps in the software load is to check the service platform version. If the version is not correct, the screen will turn yellow and you will get a pop-up notifying you that you must reghost the C drive and reinstall software to get the latest service software. If you do not do this service may not work. 1.) Place the “Application Software” CD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.

NOTE:

See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version. 2.) Wait about 15 seconds. A window will pop-up showing you the contents of the drive. 3.) Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software. 4.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute, perform steps a. and b. below. a.) Select the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select “Run…”. b.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.

Figure 8-47 Run Load Software 5.) After the screen opens to warn you that you are about to load software, press the Enter key or select OK to start the process. A Command (CMD) window opens, similar to the one shown in Figure 8-48.

8-44

Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)

Figure 8-48

Command Window

6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. Software provides the message in Figure 8-49. At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).

Figure 8-49 R2.1.1 Software Message NOTE:

When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window will disappear automatically. 7.) In BEP 3.x systems only, the system will reboot before installing the Service Platform. You will see the Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-45

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)

Figure 8-50 BEP 3 Only - System Shutdown Warning Message After the system reboots, a DOS box displays showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process is complete, another dialog box displays telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-50, but the message will be: “Computer is being rebooted to complete installation” NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading

turned off. If hyper threading is turned off the system will respond slower than expected. NOTE:

After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present, these messages are normal and should be ignored. 8.) In BEP 2.x systems only, when the process is complete, the window will turn dark red and display the following message in Figure 8-51, and the system will reboot.

Figure 8-51 Software Load Complete 9.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive. If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-52 opens. The ME2.0 will change to reflect the currently installed software.

8-46

Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)

Figure 8-52 Start Software 10.)Remove the Applications CD. 11.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start. 12.)Select Cancel.

Figure 8-53 Enter Option String 13.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork. NOTE:

Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow). Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-47

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d) 14.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below .

Table 8-8

8-48

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-11. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-12 Loading Application Software - R6.x.x 8-12-1

Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x 1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CDROM/DVD drive.

NOTE:

See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version. 2.) Wait about 30 seconds. A window pops up (see Figure 8-54) showing you the contents of the drive. Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.

Figure 8-54 LoadSoftware.bat File 3.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute then perform steps A and B below. A.) Select the START button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select “Run…”. B.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.

Figure 8-55 Run Load Software 4.) You see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software. Press the Enter key or select OK to start the process.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-49

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d) 5.) You see a window open similar to the example shown in Figure 8-48.

Figure 8-56

Command Window

6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R6.0.4 Software provides the message in Figure 8-56. Please wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).

Figure 8-57 R6.X.X Software Message NOTE:

8-50

When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window disappears automatically.

Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d) 7.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.

Figure 8-58 BEP 3 Only System Shutdown Warning Message After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-58 but the message will be: Computer is being rebooted to complete installation” NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading

turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected. NOTE:

After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present, these messages are normal and should be ignored.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-51

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d) 8.) When the software has completed loading, the system reboots. You get a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-59. (Version “R6.0.3B” in the illustration below is an example. The actual application software version will be reflected.)

Figure 8-59 Start Software 9.) REMOVE the Applications CD. 10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START (if the CD is still in the tray; otherwise, the system starts up automatically). NOTE:

If the service dongle is still plugged in, you will see the Service Login instead (see Figure 8-60).

Figure 8-60 Service Login

8-52

Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d) If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window opens.

Figure 8-61 Enter Option String 11.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit. NOTE:

Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow). Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

NOTE:

If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding is essential to proper system function and optimization. 12.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-1

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-12. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-53

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-12-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x If the customer had the Wired VoiceScan option on their system, the following procedure needs to be done to change the audio output from the wired headset to the PC Speakers. This procedure only needs to be performed after a reghost of the system.

NOTE:

This procedure is not required for Wireless VoiceScan. 1.) Plug the wired headset into the USB ports on the left side of the upper control panel.

NOTE:

After the system is turned on, the operating system assigns the headset as the new preferred playback/recording device. The following steps reassign the preferred playback device. 2.) Select Start->Settings->Control Panel->Sounds and Audio Devices to bring up the Sounds and Audio Devices properties box.

Figure 8-62 Path to Sounds and Audio Devices System --> About menu; also confirm the Base Image Load and Patch CD information on this screen. 5.) Check Date, Time, and Timezone. 6.) Restore (type in) the TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway, Network Speed) on the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP menu. Save these settings and reboot the system. 7.) Verify the Presets loaded properly. The patient data should have transferred since the upgrade only entails a C: Partition load. If the transfer failed, perform a Restore via Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore. Select to restore Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, and Service settings. The system automatically reboots. 8.) Perform audio test. 9.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper CD/DVD write functionality. 10.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-1

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-13. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

11.)Perform basic system measurements. 12.)Replace old Base Load and Application Software CDs and Documentation.

8-60

Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-14 Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only 8-14-1 NOTE:

WARNING

Application Software Upgrade Procedure When installing software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.

WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA, YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A MOD, CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE

CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.

1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive. See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version. 2.) Power Down the scanner. 3.) Power up the scanner. Wait for a dialog box like the one in Figure 8-70.

Figure 8-70 Start Application Window

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-61

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d) 4.) Select Install SW ... . 5.) Two separate dialog boxes open warning you that you are about to install new software as shown in Figure 8-71. In both cases, click OK.

Figure 8-71 StartLoader Dialog Boxes

Figure 8-72

Command Window (R2.x shown)

6.) Another window will be displayed asking you to “Press any key to continue…”.

8-62

Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d) 7.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.0 Software provides the message in Figure 8-73.

Figure 8-73 R2.1.0 Software Message At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 10 minutes). When the process is complete, the window will turn dark red, display the message in Figure 8-74, and the system will reboot.

Figure 8-74 Software Load Complete 8.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive. If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-75 opens.

Figure 8-75 Start Software 9.) Remove the Applications CD. 10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start. 11.)Select Cancel.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-63

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)

Figure 8-76 Enter Option String 12.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork. NOTE:

Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow). Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

8-14-2

Functional Checkout 1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-2

8-64

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-14. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-15 System Setup 8-15-1

To Complete the System Setup 1.) From the Touch Screen on the scanner, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCPIP Tab. 2.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually. 3.) Input the DICOM information. -

This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital network. If it is not correct, input the correct data.

4.) After all information is entered, select Save Settings. 5.) Complete the InSite Checkout again. Refer to the InSite/iLinq and InSite ExC Installation Manual, 2354611-100, Rev 4 or later.

8-15-2

VCR Setup 1.) Reset the VCR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals. 2.) Under VCR, select Sony SVO-9500 VCR or Mitsubishi MD 3000, as appropriate, and SAVE. 3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save. 4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.

8-15-3

DVR Setup 1.) Reset the DVR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals. 2.) Under VCR, select Panasonic DVR and Save. 3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save. 4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.

8-15-4

Printer Setup 1.) If the customer has a USB (Digital) Printer and it was plugged in at the time the Base Image Software was installed, it should have been recognized and automatically installed. 2.) If you did not install the printer until after the Applications software was loaded, you will need a service key (dongle) to open Windows. Follow the manual setup procedures in the LOGIQ™ 9 Peripheral Installation Manual 2341053-100. 3.) For the UP-D895 Printer, you must manually set the resolution to 1920 x 1280 whenever software is reloaded see 3-14-1 "Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)" on page 3-24.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-65

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-15-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Print Key Assignment and Checkout Because of the addition of more printer choices, digital and analog, the factory default print key configuration has been removed for the color and b/w printers. 1.) Determine which printers are configured on the system. The former factory defaults were Color = P3 and B/W = P2. 2.) Consult the customer to ensure which “Print” keys (P1-4) should be assigned to printers. 3.) Select Utility -> Admin -> Connectivity -> Buttons. Choose the desired print button. Under “Destinations”, select necessary printer choice from the drop-down list. 4.) Press the print key just configured. The screenshot prints to the destination printer.

8-15-6

Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets 1.) Place the Backup/Restore media (MOD or CD-R) in the drive. 2.) Select the Utility tab on the Touch Panel. Select System, then Backup/Restore. The Backup/Restore screen opens.

Figure 8-77 Backup / Restore Screen NOTE:

8-66

If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on with administrator privileges.

Section 8-15 - System Setup

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets (cont’d) 3.) In the Restore list, select from the following, depending on which configurations you want to restore: -

Patient Archive

-

Report Archive

-

User Defined Configuration

-

Service (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher) OR, in the Detailed Restore section select one of the following:

NOTE:

-

Imaging Presets

-

Connectivity Configuration

-

Measurement Configuration

-

Comment/Body Pattern Configuration

-

Voice Scan Training Profiles

-

Report Templates

-

3D/4D (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)

-

Fast Key (R7.x.x or Later)

-

Custom Programs (R9.x.x)

-

All Others

Only restore the Service presets onto the system from which they were backed up. Do not carry Service presets from one system to another. 4.) In the Media field, select the media that the backup is on. 5.) Select Restore. The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the System/Backup/Restore screen.

NOTE:

8-15-7

If you restore Service there is another progress bar that comes up during restore. When you do a restore, the system will automatically reboot. This only occurs after the boot where you restore Service. After this progress bar goes away the system will load normally. The progress bar will complete several full passes. This is normal.

Cycle System Power 1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.

Figure 8-78 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down 2.) Power up the system for functional check-out. Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-67

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-15-8 8-15-8-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Standby Operation Checkout To Place the System in the Standby Mode 1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays. 2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby. The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green. 3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power cable or switching off the breaker. The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:

NOTE:

-

If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power ON/OFF button blinks.

-

If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15 seconds.

Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch blinks while the system is in Standby Mode. Because of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04. 4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall. The system beeps.

NOTE:

DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged. This will turn the system off. 5.) Plug the system back in within 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.

NOTE:

It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.

NOTE:

If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time. See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.

8-15-8-2

To Wake the System from Standby Mode 1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than .25 seconds. The system becomes functional after about 45 seconds.

NOTE:

If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of Standby Mode.

NOTE:

Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.

NOTE:

Charge time for batteries is approximately 10 hours. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.

8-68

Section 8-15 - System Setup

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-15-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Functional Checkout 1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-3

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-15. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

2.) Reboot the system. 3.) If the system does not recognize the video card, perform a C: partition base load (see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26, Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38).

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-69

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-16 Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-16-1

Manpower One person, 1 hour

8-16-2

Tools Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm Phillips screwdriver size 2 Socket 8 mm

8-16-3

Preparations 1.) Shut down the system . 2.) Remove Operator Panel. 3.) Remove XY- Handle .

8-70

Section 8-16 - Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-16-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew 8 (5 mm) and 2 (3 mm) hexagon screws . 2.) Take care of the spring. 3.) Remove the Console Lock Assembly.

8-16-5

Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure 1.) Install the Lock Assembly. 2.) Install the spring. 3.) Fasten the 10 hexagon screws. 4.) Install Operator Panel. 5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-4

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-5-1 or

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or

4-5-2 or

Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or

4-5-3

Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-16. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-71

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-17 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-17-1

Manpower One person, 1 hour

8-17-2

8-17-3

Tools •

Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm

•

Phillips screwdriver size 2

•

Socket 8 mm

Preparations 1.) Shut down the system . 2.) Remove Operator Panel . 3.) Remove XY- Handle .

Strap

Screws

Screws

Screws

Figure 8-79 Release Lock Assembly

8-17-4

Release Lock Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew 8 mm nut behind XY-Handle. 2.) Unscrew 2 hexagon screws (3 mm). 3.) Unscrew 4 hexagon screws (2,5 mm). 4.) Remove Release Lock Assembly.

8-72

Section 8-17 - Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-17-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Release Lock Installation Procedure 1.) Install Release Lock Assembly. 2.) Fasten 6 hexagon screws. 3.) Fasten nut behind XY- Handle. 4.) Install XY-Handle . 5.) Install Operator Panel.

Strap

Screws

Screws

Screws

Figure 8-80 Release Lock Assembly 6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-5

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-5-1 or

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or

4-5-2 or

Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)or

4-5-3

Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-17. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

8-73

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-18 Gas Shock Replacement Procedure 8-18-1

Manpower 2 persons, 4 hours

WARNING

Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment.

WARNING

Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.

8-18-2

Tools Large coin and a large flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Long Phillips driver #2 Phillips screwdriver 5 mm Hexagon key

8-18-3

Overview Replacement of the gas shock in a LOGIQ™ 9 is not a difficult task but one that should be approached with safety in mind. The Gas Shock is used to balance the weight from the Top Console. It is located inside the frame, between the Front End Card Cage and the Back End Processor (BEP).

3

1

2

2 4 4

Figure 8-81 Typical Gas Shock Assembly

8-74

Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-18-3 Overview (cont’d) You get access to the Gas Shock via openings in the frame behind the BEP, so the BEP must be removed. To reduce the weight of the Top Console, the monitor should be removed. To release the tension in the Gas Shock, the Top Console must be secured in its upper position during replacement. Components must be removed to remove weight from the console and to gain access to the gas shock attachment points. Items removed are: -

Covers

-

Handle

-

Air Filter

-

Peripherals

-

VCR/Top Tray Frame

-

Monitor

-

Back End Processor (BEP)

Pay particular attention to all cautions and warnings in this procedure because injury could result from improper handling of components and sharp edges on metal chassis parts.

WARNING

8-18-4

When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.

Preparations 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system. 2.) Remove the left- and/or right-side covers. 3.) Remove the upper rear cover. 4.) Remove the top cover. 5.) Remove the front cover. 6.) Remove the lower rear cover. 7.) Remove the rear handle. 8.) Remove the back-end processor 9.) Remove the monitor assembly. 10.)Remove the color video printer. 11.)Remove the black and white video printer. 12.)Remove the VCR.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-75

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-18-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Top Tray Frame The Color Printer/Top Tray Frame should be remove to avoid damage to this part.

Top Tray Frame

Figure 8-82 Color Printer/Top Tray Frame 8-18-5-1

Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the four screws securing the frame to the chassis.

Figure 8-83 Remove Four Screws 2.) Remove the frame and set it aside.

8-76

Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 8-18-5-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Removal Procedure (cont’d) You should now have a chassis with all the necessary parts removed as shown in Figure 8-84 on page 8-77 .

Figure 8-84 Chassis with Necessary Parts Removed

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-77

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-18-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Gas Shock Removal The stripped down system console will be tilted on its side in order to remove and replace the gas shock. 1.) Set the back brake on the Right Side of the console. The right side is the side with the Front End Processor. 2.) Ensure that the keyboard X/Y motion (“Frogleg”) is locked. 3.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.

WARNING

Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment. 4.) Place some padded material on the floor next to the right side of the chassis. 5.) Refer to Figure 8-85, with one person at the back of the chassis and one at the keyboard handles in the front, carefully tilt the console and lay it on its right side.

Figure 8-85 Tilting the Console 6.) You should now have access to the top and bottom shock mounts as shown in Figure 8-86.

8-78

Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d)

Bottom Shock Mount

Top Shock Mount

Figure 8-86 Console on its Side

WARNING

Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury. 7.) At the top of the shock mount there is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Using 2 slotted screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp. Refer to Figure 8-87. 8.) At the top shock mount remove the: -

Top “C” (Circlip) Clip

-

Pin

-

Bushings

Slide out the top shock end.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-79

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d) Wire end lock

Release arm

Spring

Gas Spring Axle Circlip

Plastic strap

Figure 8-87 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism 9.) At the shock bottom mounting point, remove the Circlip. Refer to Figure 8-88. 10.)Remove the mounting axel and the washers. Refer to Figure 8-88. NOTE:

Take care, not to loose clips or washers. 11.)Lift up the bottom of the shock and pull it out and away from the pin.

Mounting Axel, Circlip and washers

Figure 8-88 Bottom Shock Mount

8-80

Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-18-7

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Install the New Gas Shock Reverse the removal procedure to install the new gas shock.

Figure 8-89 New Gas Shock as delivered The shock comes pre-loaded with a “stop block” tywrapped to the top of the shock to prevent accidental complete extension of the shock. Refer to Figure 8-90. The Position of the release arm is also preadjusted.

Figure 8-90 New Shock with Stop Block 1.) Slide the bottom of the shock into the bottom mount position as shown in Figure 8-91.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-81

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d)

Mounting Pin

“C” Clip

Figure 8-91 Shock Bottom Mounted 2.) Place a washer on each side of the bottom of the shock mount and align the holes as shown in Figure 8-91. NOTE:

You can use the top mounting pin to help align the bottom of the shock mount with the washers. 3.) Reach behind the bottom of the shock mount and lift the bottom mounting pin so that it slides through the washer, shock, washer and bottom mounting bracket as shown in Figure 8-91. 4.) Install the “C” clip to secure the bottom of the shock mount as shown in Figure 8-91. 5.) Move the top of the shock mount into position as shown in Figure 8-92. 6.) Assemble the top of the shock to the chassis using the pin, two washers and “C” clips as shown in Figure 8-92.

Mounting Pin

“C” Clip

Tywrap Stop Block

Figure 8-92 Top of Shock mounted

8-82

Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d) WARNING

Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment. 7.) Using two people, return the console to its upright position (sitting on all four wheels). 8.) Release the shock by cutting the tywrap and removing the stop block as shown in Figure 8-92.

8-18-8

Reassemble Z-Release 1.) Place the Release Cable Socket in the slot on the Shock top’s lower flange as shown in Figure 8-93.

Slot in Shock top’s Lower Flange Release Cable Socket

Figure 8-93 Mounting the Release Cable 2.) Tywrap the Release Cable Socket to the Shock head as shown in Figure 8-94.

Tywrap

Figure 8-94 Tywrapped Release Cable

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-83

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d) 3.) Thread the spring and barrel clamp(s) onto the Release Cable wire. Place the Barrel Clamp(s) in the Clamp cradle on the Shock’s Valve Release arm as shown in Figure 8-95.

Cable wire End

Barrel Clamps

Release Arm in Upper Position Spring

Figure 8-95 Cradled Barrel Clamps 4.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the wire end shown in Figure 8-95 above the clamp(s) and pull it upward to take up any cable slack. 5.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp(s) downwards until it rests in the Shock Valve Release Arm Clamp Cradle as shown in Figure 8-95. WARNING

Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the Cradle. If one of the tines should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced AGAIN. 6.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp. 7.) Without squeezing the Top Console Release Lever, check that the Shock Valve Release Arm is in its uppermost position as shown in Figure 8-95. 8.) Squeeze the Top Console Release Lever and watch the clamp cradle move down immediately as the lever is squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or slackened) with the Top Console cable adjustment screw.

NOTE:

Before installing the Back End Processor, check all connections to the AC Transformer box to ensure they were not disturbed while replacing the gas shock. 9.) Replace the BEP. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary. 10.)Replace the Monitor. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary. 11.)You should now be able to power up the system and check basic operation prior to installing the peripherals and covers. If the system functions normally, continue reassembling the system. 12.)After completing a basic check out, power down the system. 13.)Replace the Color Printer/Top Tray frame. 14.)Replace the VCR. 15.)Replace the B/W. 16.)Replace the Color Printer.

8-84

Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d) 17.)Replace all covers. -

Air Filter

-

Handle

-

Top Cover

-

Back Covers (Top & Bottom)

-

Front Cover

-

Filter Cover

-

Side Covers

18.)Power up the system and do a complete functional check of all peripherals. 19.)Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below Table 8-6

Functional Tests Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-3

Standby Mode

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

Section 4-4

Peripheral Checks

4-5-1 or

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or

4-5-2 or

Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or

4-5-3

Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

4-5-4

Brakes and Direction Locks Checks

Section 6-3

Monitor

10-7-4

Grounding Continuity

10-7-5

Chassis Leakage Current Test

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-18. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “

20.)Check the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation). Readjust if necessary. Refer to Section 6-5 "Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment" on page 6-8.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-85

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-19 Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure The Gas Spring Wirecable (FB307375) is a field replaceable unit. The wirecable is used when operating the Z-Release Handle to move the Top Console up/down.

8-19-1

Manpower 1 person, 1-2 hours

8-19-2

8-19-3

Tools •

Narrow standard screwdriver

•

Needle nose pliers

•

4mm allen wrench

•

Hexagon key 3mm (covers)

•

Phillips screwdriver (covers)

•

Coin and large screwdriver (covers)

Wirecable Removal Preparations 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system as shown in .

NOTICE

Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9

TAG

&

LOCKOUT Signed

Date

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: 1. Turn off the breaker. 2. Unplug the system. 3. Maintain control of the system power plug. 4. Wait at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation. Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet. 2.) Remove the Side Covers . 3.) Remove the Front Cover . Removing the Front Cover allows you easier access to raise the column cover as necessary. 4.) Remove B/W Video Printer .

8-86

Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations (cont’d) 5.) Remove VCR or DVR. Removing B/W Video Printer and VCR/DVR gives access to the lower end of wirecable and the release mechanism located behind and between the rear parts of these two units.

Disconnect Cables

B/W Printer

VCR

Figure 8-96 Disconnect and Remove the Printer and VCR or DVR 6.) Remove upper op panel and lower op panels. 7.) Lift console to top position.

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-87

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-19-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Wirecable Removal Procedure 1.) Remove Z-handle shown in Figure 8-97. c.) Unscrew 1 hexagon screw. d.) Release the wire-end lock from the handle. e.) Remove the handle. Hexagon Screw

Wire-end lock Z-Handle

Figure 8-97 Z-Release handle, view from below 2.) Cut plastic strap shown in Figure 8-98. 3.) Unscrew both upper and lower wire-end locks shown in Figure 8-98. Take care of spring.

Upper wire-end lock

Lower wire-end lock

Release arm

Wirecable

Arm fork Console Cable Assembly

Spring

Gas Spring Axle Circlip

Mantle end - lower Plastic strap

Figure 8-98 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism

8-88

Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure (cont’d) 4.) Pull the wirecable out of mantle (black rubber tube housing) from the upper end of the mantle shown in Figure 8-99.

Mantle end - upper

Figure 8-99 Z-Release handle, view from above

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-89

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

8-19-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Wirecable Installation Procedure 1.) Thread the new wirecable with prefixed wire-end lock through Z-Handle. 2.) Thread wirecable from Z-Handle down through the upper mantle (Figure 8-99) until the wirecable is visible through the lower mantle end (Figure 8-98). 3.) Reinstall Z-handle. 4.) Thread the cone-shaped spring on the lower end of the wirecable. 5.) Put two wire-end locks on wirecable and hook wire-end into the release arm fork. See Figure 8-87. 6.) Secure wirecable with a new plastic strap. See Figure 8-87. 7.) Loosen the lower wire-end lock. See Figure 8-87. 8.) Use the needle nose pliers to pull the lower end of the wirecable upwards and to push the loose wire-end lock against the release arm fork. While maintaining tension on the wirecable using the needle nose pliers in one hand (so that the Z-handle is tight and in proper position, Figure 8-100), use a flathead screwdriver in the other hand to fasten the loose lower wire-end lock. 9.) Loosen the upper lock, push it against the lower, and fasten the upper wire-end lock. 10.)Confirm the Z-handle is in proper position (Figure 8-100).

NOTE:

When the wirecable is tight, the Z-handle will be in proper position. Improper Z-handle position will affect the performance of the gas shock.

Z-Handle

Figure 8-100 Z-Release handle in proper position, view from above 11.)Perform a functional test of the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation) before cutting off overshooting lower wire-end. Readjust if necessary (see “Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment” in Chapter 6 of the Service Manual). 12.)Reinstall the upper and lower operator panels. 13.)Reinstall VCR or DVR. 14.)Reinstall B/W-Video Printer. 15.)Reinstall Front Cover. 16.)Reinstall Side Covers.

8-90

Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure (cont’d) 17.)Perform the following functional tests. If successful, include the debrief script provided below. Table 8-7

Functional Tests Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

Section 4-4 4-5-1 or 4-5-2 or

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-19. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use. “ Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or Peripheral Checks

4-5-3

Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

4-5-4

Brakes and Direction Locks Checks

7-6-1-1

Calibration Utilities

Section 7-7

I/O Devices

10-7-4

Grounding Continuity

10-7-5

Chassis Leakage Current Test

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-91

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 8-20 Frog Leg Angle Adjustment 8-20-1

Manpower Two persons, .5 hour + travel

8-20-2

Tools Hexagon keys, 5mm and 6 mm

8-20-3

Kit Contents Table 8-1 Shim Kit - LOGIQ™ 9 or Vivid 7 Op Panel (5116529)

8-20-4

Qty

Description

2

Shim Washer .635 mm thick

1

Shim Washer 1mm thick

Preparations 1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system. 2.) Remove the monitor.

8-20-5

Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure 1.) Return the console to the locked position and engage the X-Y Lock. 2.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.

8-92

Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d) 3.) Have one person hold on to the rear of the operator panel. See Figure 8-101 on page 8-93 .

Figure 8-101 Hold on to Rear of Operator Console

NOTICE Lock Tight is applied to the hex screws that attach the Operator Console to the Frogleg during

assembly. Be sure to seat the Hexagon Key firmly in the screw before attempting to unscrew so that you don’t strip the screw head.

Socket Head Cap Screw requiring 6 mm hexagon key Button Head Screws requiring 5 mm hexagon key Button Head Screws requiring 5 mm hexagon key

Figure 8-102 Screws through Frogleg to Top Console 4.) Unscrew and remove socket head cap screw from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93 and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 . 5.) Unscrew and remove four button head screws from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93 and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-93

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)

Figure 8-103 Remove Screws 6.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip it back. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .

1 mm thick washer goes on rear hole (Socket head cap screw)

.635 mm thick washers go on middle holes

.635 mm thick washers go on middle holes no shims on front holes

Figure 8-104 Place Washers (shims) on Frogleg 7.) Place 1 mm thick washer between Frogleg and Top Console so the socket head cap screw can be inserted through it. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 . 8.) Place the two .635 mm thick washers between the Frogleg and Top Console assembly so the middle button head screws can be inserted through them. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 . 8-94

Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d) 9.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip console back into place. 10.)Install socket head cap screw using care not to cross thread the casting. 11.)Install all button head screws, using care not to cross thread the casting. 12.)Tighten all five screws. 13.)Replace the monitor.

8-20-6

Functional Check 1.) Close Frog Leg. 2.) Verify “Crash Arms” extend at least 1/2 way down “Crash Pads”. See Figure 8-105 on page 8-95 and Figure 8-106 on page 8-96 .

Crash Arms

Figure 8-105 Crash Arm

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-95

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d)

Thumbnail indicates 1/2 way down Crash Pad

Figure 8-106 Crash Pad 3.) Lock and Unlock Frogleg to verify correct operation. NOTE:

If frogleg continues to rub on operator panel after the shims have been put in place, or if crash arms do not extend at least 1/2 way down the crash pads, you will need to order a new frogleg. 4.) Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.

8-96

Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d) Table 8-8

Functional Tests

Service Manual Section

Functional Test / Diagnostic Test

4-2-2

Power On / Boot Up

4-2-4

Power Off / Shutdown

4-2-5

Probe/Connectors Usage

4-2-8

System B/M-Mode Checks

4-2-9

System CFM and PWD Checks

4-2-10

Basic Measurements

4-5-1 or 4-5-2 or 4-5-3

Debrief Script

“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-20. Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or required tests and is ready for use. “ Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)

Section 6-3

Monitor

7-6-1-1

Calibration Utilities

Section 7-7

I/O Devices

10-7-4

Grounding Continuity

10-7-5

Chassis Leakage Current Test

Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

8-97

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER8.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL This page was intentionally left blank.

8-98

Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 9 Renewal Parts Section 9-1 Overview 9-1-1

Purpose of Chapter 9 This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the LOGIQ™ 9. Table 9-1

Contents in Chapter 9

Section

Description

Page Number

9-1

Overview

9-1

9-2

List of Abbreviations

9-3

9-3

Console View

9-4

9-4

External Covers

9-5

9-5

Additional Console Hardware

9-7

9-6

Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

9-9

9-7

Operator Control Panel Brackets

9-13

9-8

Gas Spring

9-14

9-9

Monitor Assembly

9-16

9-10

Operator Control Panel Assembly

9-20

9-11

Front End Processor Assembly

9-26

9-12

I/O Interfaces

9-32

9-13

3-D Externals

9-34

9-14

Back End Processor Assemblies

9-35

9-15

Software

9-41

9-16

Interconnect Cables

9-44

9-17

Power Distribution Modules

9-61

9-18

Air Distribution

9-62

9-19

Voice Scan

9-63

9-20

4D Components

9-66

9-21

Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components

9-67

9-22

Peripherals

9-68

9-23

Customer Documentation

9-69

9-24

Probes

9-70

Chapter 9

9-1

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-1-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers Table 9-2

LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations Part Number

Description

2188900

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0

2188900-4

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0

2188900-5

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0

2188900-6

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0

2351100

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2351100-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2351100-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02

2375600

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03

2375600-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03

2375600-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03

2404587

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

2404587-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04

5150000

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06

5150000-2

LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06

5150000-3

LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06

5177000

LOGIQ™ 9 120-60V Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*

5177000-2

LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V PAL Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*

5177000-3

LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V NTSC Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*

*BT09 is a software-only upgrade

Special Service Tool: service key/dongle (p/n 066E0703) required for some GE proprietary operations.

9-2

Section 9-1 - Overview

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/22/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-2 List of Abbreviations • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Assy - Assembly BEP - Back End Processor CRU - Customer Replacement Unit Ctrl - Control FEP - Front End Processor F.O.B - Flock of Birds or 3-D Option FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved) LCD - Liquid Crystal Display Int - Internal I/O - Input/Output PWA - Printed Wire Assembly Recv - Receive XFRMR - Transformer

Chapter 9

9-3

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-3 Console View

Left

Front

Rear

Right

Figure 9-1 Console Views Table 9-3

Parts by Table Numbers

Part Table Name

Table Number

Part Table Name

Table Number Table 9-20

External Covers

Table 9-4

Back End Processor Assemblies

Table 9-21 Table 9-22

Additional Console Hardware

Table 9-5

BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.x

Table 9-23

BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.x

Table 9-24

Software Tools

Table 9-25

Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

Table 9-6

Peripheral Cables

Table 9-26 Table 9-27 Table 9-28 Table 9-29 Table 9-30

Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086

Table 9-7

Power Distribution

Table 9-31

Operator Panel Brackets

Table 9-8

Air Distribution Parts

Table 9-32

Gas Spring

Table 9-9

Voice Scan

Table 9-33

Monitor Assembly - Standard

Table 9-10

Wireless Interconnect

Table 9-34

Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD

Table 9-11 Table 9-12

4 D Parts

Table 9-35

Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper

Table 9-14

Continuous Wave Doppler Components

Table 9-36

Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower

Table 9-15 Table 9-16

Approved Peripherals

Table 9-37

Front End Processor Assembly

Table 9-17

User Documentation

Table 9-38

I/O Interfaces

Table 9-18

Available Probes

Table 9-39

3-D Externals

Table 9-19

Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix

Table 9-40

9-4

Section 9-3 - Console View

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-4 External Covers

101 107

101A

102 102A 105 105A 103 103A 106

103B

104 104A 104B

108 108A

109

110

109A

110A

111

Figure 9-2 External Covers

Chapter 9

9-5

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

External Covers (cont’d) Table 9-4

Item

External Covers

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

101

Top Cover

FB307383

Replaced with FC307772

1

-

N

101A

Top Cover

FC307772

Replaces FB307383

1

-

1

Front Cover

FC307771

Cover only

1

-

1

Front Cover Assembly

FC200076

with Two Labels, Apply the Appropriate Label

1

-

1

Right Side Cover

FC307422

Cover only

1

-

1

103A

Right Side Cover Assembly

FC200074

with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

103B

Right Side Cover Assembly

FC200422

with bumper and GE Logo. If ordering to replace non-logo cover, also order FC200421 and replace set

1

-

1

Left Side Cover

FC307773

Cover only

1

-

1

104A

Left Side Cover Assembly

FC200073

with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

104B

Left Side Cover Assembly

FC200421

with bumper and GE Logo. If ordered to replace non-logo cover, also order FC200422 and replace set

1

-

1

Rear Cover

FC307776

Cover only

1

-

1

Rear Cover Assembly

FC200077

with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

106

Rear Filter Cover

FB200385

with brackets - Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

107

Footrest Bumper

FB307387

1

-

1

108

Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert

FB307990

Replaced with FC307785

1

-

N

108A

Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert

FC307785

Replaces FB307990

1

-

1

109

B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert

FB307989

Replaced with FC307784

1

-

N

109A

B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert

FC307784

Replaces FB307989

1

-

1

110

VCR Cavity Filler Insert

FB307988

Replaced with FC307783

1

-

N

110A

VCR Cavity Filler Insert

FC307783

Replaces FB307988

1

-

1

Filter Media

FB307903

Dust Filter - Same as Vivid 7 -

1

Y

1

102 102A 103

104

105 105A

111

9-6

Section 9-4 - External Covers

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-5 Additional Console Hardware

146

145 151 151A

152 145A

148 148A

147 147A

144

149

143

150 150A 150B

142

149A

141 142A

Figure 9-3 Additional Console Hardware

Chapter 9

9-7

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-5

Additional Console Hardware (cont’d) Table 9-5

Item 141

142

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Additional Console Hardware

Part Name Caster Hub Caps

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

2293008-5

Need to order 2 per caster, adhesive mounting

1

-

1

2

-

1

2

-

1

2

-

1

2293008-3

Rear Casters (wheels)

Does Not Have Pedal Activated Swivel Lock Assembly. Manual Swivel Lock - Same as Vivid 7 Also order FC200829 Wooden wedge and bevel edge board rear caster replacement tools

Rear Caster Replacement Tool

FC200829

143

Front Casters (wheels)

2293008-2

144

Shelf Cover

2291452

1

-

1

145

TV/TR Probe Holder Front

2291455

1

-

1

145A

TV/TR Probe Holder Rear

2299040

1

-

1

146

Pocket Shelf Mat

2291453

1

-

1

147

Under Shelf Cover

2291454

1

-

2

147A

Under Shelf Cover

2291454-2

1

-

2

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

142A

148 148A 149 149A 150

Includes Swivel Lock Assembly - Same as Vivid 7 -

BT06 and later

Right Probe Holder Assembly

2299038

Right Probe Holder Assembly - DSB

5212181

Left Probe Holder Assembly

2299039

Left Probe Holder Assembly - DSB

5212272

BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue

1

-

1

Gel Warmer Assembly * see note

2291461

*Need to order GE Logo Decal 2269030-15 or L9 Logo Decal 5255441

1

-

1

BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue

150A

GE Logo Decal for Gel Warmer

2269030-15

Must order when replacing Gel Warmer

1

-

1

150B

L9 Logo Decal for Gel Warmer

5255441

Must order when replacing Gel Warmer

1

-

1

151

Gel Warmer Power Source

2329637

12VDC Power Source - Obsolete (See FMI 70183)

1

-

N

151A

Gel Warmer Power Source

2329637-3

6VDC Power Source (BT’06 and earlier)

1

-

1

Gel Warmer and Subwoofer Power Supply

5133204-6

Dual Out Power Supply & Gel Warmer (BT’06 and later)

1

-

1

152

9-8

Section 9-5 - Additional Console Hardware

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

173

177

170

176 171

172

175 175A

179

180

181

185

182 182A

183 183A

184

178

Figure 9-4 OP I/O Mechanical Parts Chapter 9

9-9

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-6

Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (cont’d) Table 9-6

Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

170

Top Console Upper Casting Assembly

2331665

Assembly for Service

1

-

2

171

Top Console Lower Casting Assembly

2331858

Assembly for Service

1

-

2

172

Frogleg (complete)

FB200340

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

2

173

Frogleg Bumper Kit

FC200086

1

-

1

175

Rear Handle Assembly

FB200406

with cable wrap hooks - Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

5199876

BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue

1

-

1

175A

Rear Handle Assembly - DSB

goes on back/top half of Frogleg arms - Same as Vivid 7 -

176

Brake Lock Pedal

FB307407

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

177

Directional Lock Pedal

FB307409

Swivel Lock Pedal

1

-

1

178

Upper Column Cover

FC307787

1

-

1

178

Lower Column Cover

FC307779

1

-

1

179

Top Console Lock Assembly

FB200350

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

2

180

Lock Release

FB200920

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

2

181

X-Y Release Handle

FB307297

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

2

182

Z-Release Handle

FB307296

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

2

5213108

BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue

1

-

2

FC200131

Front Handle with Label in center

1

-

1

5213255

BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue

1

-

1

182A 183 183A

Z-Release Handle - DSB Main Handle with Label Main Handle - DSB

Part of Kit Column Cover Kit FC200088

184

Pedal Assembly

FB200595

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

185

Wire Cable, Gas Spring

FB307375

Wire used when operating vertical movement of Top Console - Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

2

5116529

Needed on some models to keep the frogleg from rubbing on the operator console Kit contains two .635 mm washers and one 1mm washer See Section 8-20 "Frog Leg Angle Adjustment" on page 8-92

1

-

1

186

Frogleg Shim Kit

188

Subwoofer Speaker Assembly

5133204-2

1

-

1

189

Speaker Harness

5133204-3

1

-

1

190

Speaker Grill

5133204-4

1

-

1

191

Knob

5133204-5

1

-

1

9-10

Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-6

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (Continued)

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

192

Brake mechanism - Left Connecting Rod

FB307471

- Same as Vivid 7 threaded rod between front brake and caster. Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper screws as necessary

1

-

1

193

Brake mechanism - Right Connecting Rod

FB307472

- Same as Vivid 7 threaded rod between front brake and caster Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper screws as necessary

1

-

1

194

Brake mechanism - Parking Brake Pedal screws

080X0612

- Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism

1

-

1

195

Brake mechanism - Front Bumper screws

080X0612

- Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism -

1

-

1

Chapter 9

9-11

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-6-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Bumper Kit, Frogleg

3

5

1

2

4

Figure 9-5 Bumper Kit, Frogleg, Base Seen From Above Table 9-7

Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

BUMPER CRASH PAD

-

Bumper Crash Rear

1

-

N

2

BUMPER INNER BOSS

-

-

1

-

N

3

BUMPER RIGHT FROGLEG

-

-

1

-

N

4

BUMPER LEFT FROGLEG

-

-

1

-

N

5

BUMPER INNER BOSS CRASH

-

-

2

-

N

9-12

Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-7 Operator Control Panel Brackets

Bracket on units built before Mid-2002. Replaced by Item # 192.

191

192

190 193

194 194A Figure 9-6 Operator Panel Brackets Table 9-8

Operator Panel Brackets

Item

Part Name

Part Number

190

Storage Tray Bracket

191

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

2306018

1

-

2

Upper Casting Bracket

2291449

1

-

2

192

“U” Bracket

2330476

1

-

2

193

TV/TR Front Bracket

2306021

1

-

2

194

Bulkhead Bracket

2305886

1

-

2

194A

Bulkhead Bracket

5119174

1

-

1

‘U’ Shaped Bracket, Nut is Attached to Casting

Does Not Include s Through BT03 with SVGA Style BT04 with DVI Style

Chapter 9

9-13

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-8 Gas Spring WARNING

WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE GAS SPRING IS COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY. DURING NORMAL OPERATION THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR AND THE MECHANICAL FORCE OF THE GAS SPRING ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE IF/WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THIS GAS SPRING. PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND THE SPRING PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE ELEVATION ASSEMBLY.

4 3

2

1

1A

Figure 9-7 Gas Spring Table 9-9 Item

Gas Spring

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

1

-

1

- Same as Vivid 7BT’04 and earlier 1

Gas Spring

080X4500

NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part 5160374. For CRT or LCD, BT’06 and later

1A

9-14

Gas Spring (BT’06)

5160374

NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part 5160374.

Section 9-8 - Gas Spring

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-9

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Gas Spring (Continued)

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

2

Socket, Wire Cross Spring

FB307376

Socket for Gas Spring release cable

1

-

1

3

Spring for Release Wire

080X4010

1

-

1

4

Nipple Screws

080X4530

1

-

1

Chapter 9

9-15

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-9 Monitor Assembly 9-9-1

CRT Monitor Assembly 252

259

253 251

258

256 257 260

254 255

Figure 9-8 Monitor Assembly - Standard Table 9-10 Item

Monitor Assembly - Standard

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

2283334-4

- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-

1

-

1

1

-

2

2

-

2

251

Open Frame Monitor

252

Monitor Cable Assembly

2304171

253

Speaker and Mounting Bracket Kit

2297882

254

Monitor Tilt/Swivel/Male Post

2284225

Neck Assembly

1

-

2

255

Monitor Rear Cover Assembly

2303930

Assembly with Speaker Grills

1

-

2

256

Monitor Left Speaker Grill

2279675

Labeled as the LEFT Speaker Grill

1

-

2

257

Monitor Right Speaker Grill

2279676

Labeled as the RIGHT Speaker Grill

1

-

2

258

Monitor Screw Caps (covers)

2303932

Covers the screws on each side in the back of the cover - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-

2

-

2

259

Monitor Front Bezel Assembly

2303929-2

Includes three logos Vivid 7, LOGIQ 7 and LOGIQ 9

1

-

2

260

Monitor Switch Assembly

2297050

User Switch Assembly

1

-

2

9-16

- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7see Callout 545 on page 9-44

Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-9-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD

261 261A

263

264

265 270 266

262 269 268

269A

267

271

272

Figure 9-9 Monitor Assembly - LCD 17” Table 9-11 Item

Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

Going obsolete. If unavailable, use 5169935-2

1

-

1

261

17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display

5125393

261A

17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display

5169935-2

1

-

1

262

17 inch Speaker Set

5132576

1

-

1

263

17 inch Panel Front LCD

5132572

1

-

1

264

17 inch Panel Rear LCD

5132573

1

-

1

265

17 inch Rear Cover VESA LCD

5166624

1

-

1

266

17 inch Mic & Switch Assembly LCD

5137744

1

-

1

267

17 inch LCD ARM

5130651

1

-

1

268

17 inch LCD Arm Gas Spring

5224462

1

-

1

269

LCD Video Card

5111298

Matrox card - If no longer available, order 5111298-2

1

-

1

269A

LCD Video Card

5111298-2

Matrox card

1

-

1

1

-

1

BT06 and later

17 “ LCD Arm Assembly with (4) cables

270

17 inch LCD Cables (4)

5135957

271

17 inch Spiral Wrap - 1/2”

5152397

1/2” - Power and DVI HDMI cables

1

-

1

272

17 inch Spiral Wrap - 3/8”

5152399

3/8” - Speaker and Ground cables

1

-

1

273

17 inch LCD Adapter

5135957-6

HDMI to DVI-I adapter

1

-

1

Chapter 9

9-17

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-9-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD

276

277

280

285

277A

278 286 286A 288 287

281

282

283

284

281A

282

283A

284A

283B 279

Figure 9-10 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD Table 9-12 Item

Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

276

19 inch LCD Monitor

5212808

19” LCD Monitor, also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap and (1) 46-208747P1 ty wrap mount

1

-

1

277

19 inch LCD Rear Cover

5199018

Rear Cover

1

-

1

46-312358P36

Screw for Rear Cover

1

-

1

277A

19 inch LCD Rear Cover Screw

278

Adaptor Power Supply Assy

5212977

Power Supply, Ty wraps

1

-

1

279

19 inch LCD Speaker Assy

5199460

19” LCD Speaker Assembly

1

-

1

280

19 inch LCD ARM

5212677

19” LCD Arm Assembly

1

-

1

281

19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable

5198235-2

Microphone Cable crosses up to 5256603

1

-

1

281A

19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable

5256603

Microphone Cable, alternate to 5198235-2

1

-

1

19 inch LCD Video Cable

5214911

Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps, crosses up to 5256600

1

-

1

282

9-18

Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-12 Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD (Continued) Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

19 inch LCD Video Cable

5256600

Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps, alternate to 5214911

1

-

1

283

19 inch LCD DC Power

5212254

DC Power Cable, also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap, crosses up to 5256601 and 5256601-1

1

-

1

283A

19 inch LCD DC Power

5256601

DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254, obsolete, use 5256601-1

1

-

1

283B

19 inch LCD DC Power

5256601-1

DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254

1

-

1

282A

Part Name

284

19 inch LCD Speaker Cable

5198216

Speaker Cable, crosses up to 5256602

1

-

1

284A

19 inch LCD Speaker Cable

5256602

Speaker Cable, alternate to 5198216

1

-

1

285

19 inch LCD Arm Adaptor Assy

5220151

Arm Adaptor Assy - Bushing and Screw

1

-

1

286

19 inch LCD AC Power Cable

5198490

Power Cable AC, crosses up to 5256605

1

-

1

286A

19 inch LCD AC Power Cable

5256605

Power Cable AC, alternate to 5198490

1

-

1

287

19 inch Subwoofer Ground Reference Cable

5234477

Adapter between subwoofer/gel warmer PS and gel warmer

1

-

1

288

19 inch LCD AC Power Cable

5256605-2

LCD power cable (longer) used on BT01, BT02, BT03 LCD factory upgrades

1

-

1

Chapter 9

9-19

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly 9-10-1

Upper Op Panel 201 201A 201B 201C 201D 201E

203 203A 204 Inside Touch Panel Assembly

205

202 202A 202B

Figure 9-11 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Upper

Table 9-13 Console Type FRU

Console/Operator Panel Compatibility Matrix

BT01/02/03 - OR BT01/02/03 console upgraded to BT07 and Later BEP 4.1 2188902-3 (obsolete)

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-13 (obsolete)

Lower Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-xx

LCD Backlight Inverter TGC (Slide Pot) PWA

2188902-33

BT04/06/07 BEP 3.x

Forward Production BT07/BT09

CRU

2404652 -103

-

2404652-3 (obsolete) 2404652-13

2188902-6 (obsolete) 2188902-16 2188902-7

2404652-xx

-

2404652-6

-

2404652-7

-

Bezel - Upper Op Panel

2188902-15

-

Slide Pot Knobs

5115063

Y

9-20

Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-10

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Operator Control Panel Assembly (cont’d) Table 9-14

Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

201

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-3

Obsolete - use 2188902-13

1

-

N

201A

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-13

1

-

1

201B

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-33

has USB port - new style spacer between bezel & touchpanel Replaces 2188902-13

1

-

1

201C

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2404652-3

BT04 Only - with simplified cable interface. If unavailable, use 2404652-13. Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2

1

-

1

201D

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2404652-13

BT04 and later consoles Must be used with BEP4.1 (LVDS) or BEP 3.x Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2

1

-

1

201E

Upper Operator Panel Assembly

2404652-103

Must use with BEP4.0 (DVI) Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-xx

1

-

1

1

-

1

has USB port A Use 2188902-33 (when 2188902-13 no longer available)

Use with 2188902-3 or -13

202

LCD Backlight Inverter

2188902-6

202A

LCD Backlight Inverter

2404652-6

BT04 and later - Use with 2404652-3 or 2404652-13 Cannot be used with 2188902 series op panels

1

-

1

202B

LCD Backlight Inverter

2188902-16

Backward compatible with 2188902-6

1

-

1

203

TGC (Slide Pot) PWA

2188902-7

Circuit board slide pot - For use with Upper Op Panel 2188902-3 or 2188902-13

1

-

1

203A

TGC (Slide Pot) PWA

2404652-7

Circuit board slide pot - Use w/Upper Op Panel 2404652-3 or -13

1

-

1

204

Bezel - Upper Operator Panel

2188902-15

1

-

1

205

Slide Pot Knobs

1

-

1

5115063

When depleted, use 2188902-16

Group of ten knobs on TGC PWA

Chapter 9

9-21

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-10-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Lower Operator Panel 211 211A 211B

211C

217

211D 211E 216 224

212 212A 212B 212C 213 213A 213B

225

214 214A 214B 222 222A 223 223A

215 215A 215B

Figure 9-12 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower Table 9-15

Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

211

Lower Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-2

- Obsolete use 2188902-32

1

-

N

211A

Lower Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-12

1

-

N

With Standby. Backward compatible. R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE this part. When depleted, use 2188902-32.

211B

211C

Lower Operator Panel Assembly

Lower Operator Panel Assembly

2188902-32

BT03 lower op panel with 4D markings on buttons

1

-

1

2404652-2

BT’04 with simplified cable interface Can only be used with upper op panel 2404652-xx (May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-4 if Upper Op Panel is Rev1) When depleted, use 2404652-32.

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

N

1

-

N

Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops 211D

Lower Operator Panel Assembly

2404652-12

Can only be used with upper op panel 2404652-1xx (May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-14 if Upper Op Panel is Rev1) When depleted, use 2404652-32

211E

212

212A

Lower Operator Panel Assembly

2404652-32

A/N Keyboard - English

2188902-4

A/N Analog Keyboard - English

2188902-14

Lower OP Panel Assembly BT07 and later. Includes 2404652-15 trackball. Backward compatible with 2404652-12, -2 Must be used with upper op panel: 2404652-3, -13, or -103 May be used with BEP 3.x, BEP 4.0 or BEP 4.1 Alpha Numeric Keyboard R3.X.X Software MUST USE 2188902-14 Obsolete - use 2188902-14 With Standby. Backward compatible. R3.X.X Software MUST USE this part When depleted, use 2404652-4 or 2404652-14. Do NOT use 2188902-14 in 2404652-x op panel.

9-22

Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-15

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower (Continued)

Item

Part Name

Part Number

212B

A/N Analog Keyboard - English

2404652-4

212C

A/N Analog Keyboard - English

2404652-14

213

A/N Keyboard - Russian

2188902-20

213A

A/N Keyboard - Russian

2404652-20

213B

A/N Keyboard - Russian

2404652-50

214

A/N Keyboard - Greek

2188902-21

214A

A/N Keyboard - Greek

2404652-21

214B

A/N Keyboard - Greek

2404652-51

Trackball

215A 215B

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytop. Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.

1

-

1

As required

1

-

1

1

-

1

Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops

1

-

1

As required

1

-

1

1

-

1

Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops

1

-

1

2188902-5

When depleted, use 2404652-15.

1

-

1

Trackball Assembly

2404652-5

When depleted, use 2404652-15.

1

-

1

Trackball Assembly

2404652-15

Backward compatible with 2404652-5, 2188902-5

1

-

1

5111708

1

Y

1

1

-

1

BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting

215

When depleted, use 2404652-14. Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.

BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting When depleted, use 2404652-50.

BT’04 and BT06 improved back lighting When depleted, use 2404652-51.

216

4D Probe Holder

217

Bezel - Lower Operator Panel

2188902-11

222

A/N Keyboard - Swedish

2404652-22

Use 2404652-52 (when 2404652-22 stock is depleted)

1

-

1

222A

A/N Keyboard - Swedish

2404652-52

Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops

1

-

1

223

A/N Keyboard - Norwegian

2404652-26

Use 2404652-56 (when 2404652-26 stock is depleted)

1

-

1

223A

A/N Keyboard - Norwegian

2404652-56

Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops

1

-

1

066E2306

Replacement part for all lower op panels: e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12

1

-

1

2404652-19

Replacement part for all lower op panels: e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12

1

-

1

224

Single Shaft Encoder

225

Concentric Shaft Encoder

Chapter 9

9-23

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-10-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs

218 218A

222

219

221

219A

220

Figure 9-13 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower 9-24

Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-10-3

Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs (cont’d) Table 9-16

Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower - Buttons and Knobs Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

Universal Knob Kit

2384216

Obsolete - order 5114700

1

-

N

Universal Knob Kit

5114700

All blue gumdrop knobs - Replaces 2384216 This Kit contained; 4 small domed knobs, 4 large dished knobs, 6 large domed knobs same as Vivid 7

1

Y

1

Programmable Button Keytop Kit

2188902-9

Key caps for customer to customize the P1 - P4 key caps

1

Y

1

Button Cap Kit

2188902-10

Includes all buttons (except thumb buttons)

1

Y

1

220

Key Ring and Operator Panel Mode select Knob Kit

2188902-8

Includes: 4 Mode select knobs (Inner & Outer pieces) and Key Ring

1

-

N

221

Mode Select Knob Kit with 3D/ 4D Button with XYZ markings

2404652-8

Four Mode Select Knobs (M, PW, CF, B) and 3D/4D Grey Bowl Button

1

Y

1

222

F5 and F6 A/N keytops

2404652-9

F5 and F6 A/N keytops, along with key puller

1

Y

1

218

218A

219 219A

Part Name

Chapter 9

9-25

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-11 Front End Processor Assembly 406A 407

404

406

403

402 402A

BT’01 Card Rack

401

408

409 409A 409C 409D

405 405A BT’02, BTCard Rack

412

413

411 through 411F

414

Empty Card Slot 402B 402C 402D

406B

402E

406C 405B 405C 405D

408A

410 410A

409B 409E 409F 409G 409H

Figure 9-14 Front End Processor Assembly 9-26

Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Front End Processor Assembly (cont’d)

R3.X.X

R4.X.X

R6.X.X

R7.X.X/R9.X.X

Item

Part Name

Part Number

401

Back Plane

2260219

X

402

SCB1

2260214-2

X

2260214-3

X1

402A SCB1.1

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

5177000-x (BT07/BT09)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)

5150000-x (BT06) X

5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)

2404587-X (BT04) X

2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT’03)

2351100-X (BT’02)

2188900-X (BT’01)

LOGIQ 9 Model Number

X

X

X

5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R2.X.X

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Applications Software

Front End Processor Assembly

5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Table 9-17

H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Section 9-11

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Description X

X

X

402B SCB2

2365739

X

X X

402C SCB2

2365739-3

X

X X

402D SCB2-4

2365739-4

X

X X

402E SCB2-5

2365739-5

X

X X

Q C F t R R y U U

Front End Back Plane

1

-

2

Scan Control Board. Use 2260214-3 if stock is depleted

1

-

1

Scan Control Board 1 Required if using EBM Board

-

1

Has BT03 Functionality Obsolete

1

-

N

X

X

X

Included power up transmit overload fix - Obsolete

1

-

N

X

X

X

X

Additional transmit overload 1 fix during run time - Obsolete

-

N

X

X

X

X

Supervisory Circuit and 4D Reset Updates.

1

-

1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

403

BMP4

2260207

X

B-Mode Processor

1

-

1

404

EQ4

2260210

X

Equalization Board

1

-

1

405

TD4

2260194-2

X

X

X X

X

X

X

Transmit/Delay Board. When stock depleted order 2260194-3

1

-

1

2260194-3

X

X

X X

X

X

X

Transmit/Delay Board You can mix TD4s and TD4.1s

1

-

1

1

-

1

405A TD4.1

405B TD5

2362863

X

X

X

Chapter 9

X

X

X

X

New power requirements different from TD4. Can not mix with TD4s. Requires FEPS3 You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s When stock depleted order 2386031

9-27

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

R4.X.X

R6.X.X

R7.X.X/R9.X.X

Item

Part Name

2386031

405D TD6

5142651

RF AMP

406A RF AMP1.2

5177000-x (BT07/BT09)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)

5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

5150000-x (BT06)

2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2404587-X (BT04)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT’03)

Part Number

405C TD5.1

406

2351100-X (BT’02)

2188900-X (BT’01)

LOGIQ 9 Model Number

X

X

X

X

X

X

2260212

X

2341985-2

X

X

X

X

X X

X

Description X

X

X

X

5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R3.X.X

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R2.X.X

5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Applications Software

Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)

H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Table 9-17

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

X

X

Q C F t R R y U U

Same Function as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s

1

-

1

Not Backward Compatible -Used with R6.0.0 and later.

1

-

1

Radio Frequency Amplifier Board Obsolete - Use 2341985-2

1

-

N

Design Improvement

1

-

1

1

-

1

New power requirement different from RF AMP1.X Requires FEPS3 406B RF AMP2

406C RF AMP2-2

2357621

X4

X4

X4

2357621-2

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

407

XDIF

2260221

X

X

X

408

Top Plane

2291656

X4

X4

X4

X4

408A Top Plane

5115468

X

X

409

9-28

FEPS

2260203

X X

X

X

X

X4 X4

X4 X4

X

Must only use 5115468 T Plane Use 2357621-2 if stock depleted

X

X

X

Same as RF Amp 2-2 except has schottky diodes Must use 2291656 Top Plane

1

-

1

X

X

X

Transducer Interface Board 1

-

1

1

-

1

Has schottky diodes

1

-

1

Front End Power Supply Obsolete When replaced with 2273641-3 or 2273641-4, requires replacement of the Front End Card Rack Cover in Kit 2374426

1

-

N

Top Plane connects XDIF to X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 RF Amp on front of cards. No schotky diodes X

X

X

X

X3

Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

R4.X.X

R6.X.X

R7.X.X/R9.X.X

Item

Part Name

5177000-x (BT07/BT09)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)

5150000-x (BT06)

5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)

2404587-X (BT04)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT’03)

2351100-X (BT’02)

2188900-X (BT’01)

LOGIQ 9 Model Number

Part Number

5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R3.X.X

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R2.X.X

5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Applications Software

Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)

H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Table 9-17

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Description

Q C F t R R y U U

409A FEPS2

2273641-3

X3

X

X X

X

X

X

Second Generation FEPS Cross to a FEPS2.1 if stock is depleted May require Front End Card Rack cover kit 2374426 if replacing a 2260203 FEPS

409B FEPS2.1

2273641-4

X3

X

X X

X

X

X

Second Generation with Standby Capabilities cross up to -6

1

-

1

409C FEPS2.5

2273641-5

X3

X

X X

X

X

X

partial latch fix (all but -5 V analog)

1

-

1

409D FEPS2.6

2273641-6

X3

X

X X

X

X

X

Replaces FEPS2 (2273641-3) and FEPS2.1 (2273641-4) Only applies to TD4 systems

1

-

1

1

-

N

409E FEPS3

2376843

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Analog Voltages are +/- 6V and 13V compared to +/-5v and 12V found in FEPS, FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 Must use in systems w/ TD5.X and RF Amp2 (DO NOT use in R2.X.X systems or Systems upgraded to BT’03)

1

-

1

Transmit overload fix (2376843-6): Replaces 237643 and 2376843-3, FMI 70188. 2376843-92 replaces 2376843-2 (for BT03 systems with TD5.x boards) 409F FEPS3.2

2376843-2

X

409G FEPS3.3

2376843-3

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Partial latch fix (all but -6 V analog)

1

-

N

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Replaces 2376843 and 2376843-2

1

-

1

Chapter 9

9-29

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

R4.X.X

R6.X.X

R7.X.X/R9.X.X

Part Name

Part Number

409H FEPS3.6

2376843-6

Item

410

FEP AC Line Filter & Cable

410A FEP AC Line Filter

2315960

X

X

2375555

X

X

X

X

X

5177000-x (BT07/BT09)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)

5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

5150000-x (BT06)

2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2404587-X (BT04)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT’03)

2351100-X (BT’02)

2188900-X (BT’01)

LOGIQ 9 Model Number

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Description X

X*

5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R3.X.X

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R2.X.X

5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Applications Software

Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)

H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Table 9-17

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

X

X

X

X

X

Q C F t R R y U U

Replaces FEPS3 to eliminate transmit overload.

1

-

1

Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter and Power Harness Obsolete, use 2375555 except for BT01

1

-

1

Backward compatible for BT07 and earlier, *except for BT01 systems.

1

-

1

1

-

N

EBM

2273639-3

X2

X

Combined functions of EQ4 & BMP4. Positioned in the old EQ4 Slot. Needs SCB 2260214-3 Obsolete - replace with 2273639-6

411A EBM

2273639-6

X

X

I2C Reliability Improvements

1

-

1

411B EBM1.8

2273639-5

X

X X

EBM Board Upgraded to EBM2 functionality - Replace with EBM2, 2273639-21

1

-

N

411C EBM2

2273639-20

X

X X

Has BT03 Functionality obsolete - Replace with 2273639-21

1

-

N

411D EBM2

2273639-21

X

X X

Has BT’03 Functionality - I2C Reliability Improvements

1

-

1

1

-

N

1

-

1

411

411E EBM2.5

2273639-23

X

X

X

Has BT’04 Functionality 4D Option requires 2273639-24

X

Obsolete - replace with 2273639-24 411F EBM2.6

9-30

2273639-24

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly

X

Has BT’04 Functionality Required for 4D Option

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

R4.X.X

R6.X.X

R7.X.X/R9.X.X

Item 412

413

Part Name

Part Number

FEP Card Cage Front Cover Kit

2374426

FEP Card Cage Front Cover Kit

5159491

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

5177000-x (BT07/BT09)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)

5150000-x (BT06) X

5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)

2404587-X (BT04)

X X

2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT’03 upgrade)

2188900-X (BT01 - BT’03 upgrade)

2375600-X (BT’03)

2351100-X (BT’02)

2188900-X (BT’01)

LOGIQ 9 Model Number

5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R3.X.X

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)

R2.X.X

5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Applications Software

Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)

H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)

Table 9-17

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Description

X

X

Obsolete, use 5159491

X

X

X

X

X

Required if upgrading from FEPS to FEPS2/FEP2.1 Additional shielding around Top Plane and Power Supply areas. Labels included in kit to match FEP configuration.

Q C F t R R y U U 1

-

N

1

-

1

1

-

1

Corrects barber pole artifact. 414 1

Card Cage

2373269

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Cover with power supply shield

SCB1 can be used on this model number also.

2

EBM can be used on this model replacing the BMP4 and EQ4. However EBM requires SCB1.1 at a minimum.

3

FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 can be used on this model number. However, must also use FEP Card Rack Cover Kit 2374426.

4

Combination of Top Plane and RF AMP must have at least one schotky diode. Therefore, never use 2357621 and 2291656 together.

Chapter 9

9-31

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-12 I/O Interfaces

301

302 302A

303

USB MODEM OPTION INTERNAL I/0 Connects to Phone Line

w/ Modem

BEP

MODEM C18

w/ Modem

304

Figure 9-15 I/O Interfaces

9-32

Section 9-12 - I/O Interfaces

303A

302B

302C

302D

302E

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-12

I/O Interfaces (cont’d) Table 9-18

Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

I/O Interfaces

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

1

-

N

1

-

N

1

-

1

1

-

N

301

External I/O Assembly

FB200198

302

Internal I/O Assembly

FB200197

- Same as Vivid 7 Obsolete - Use FC200423 - Same as Vivid 7 -

302A

Internal I/O Assembly

FC200423

Has gain increase for improved microphone performance Used on BT03 and earlier Obsolete - Use FC200695

302B

Internal I/O Assembly

FC200695

Replaces FC200423

302C

Internal IO W/Gender change

FC200503

BT04 Only - Has male connector for II/O to BEP cable - Same as Vivid 7 Obsolete - Use FC200889 302D

Internal IO W/Gender change

FC200651

Obsolete - Use FC200889

1

-

N

302E

Internal IO W/Gender change

FC200889

BT04 systems and later - replaces FC200503 and FC200651

1

-

1

Global Modem Assembly

2245794

Multi-Tech - New installation requires cable kit #2368850 -Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

USB Global Modem Kit

5112680

1

-

1

1

-

1

303

303A

Includes modem 5114058, and Telco Adapter Kit 2249450 Used with BEP3 only

304

USB Modem

5114058

Includes USB Modem, USB Cable, and phone cables Used with BEP3 only

Chapter 9

9-33

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-13 3-D Externals

470

471

Figure 9-16 3-D Externals Table 9-19

3-D Externals

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

470

3-D Externals - PCI Bird Transmitter

2301019-4

Option Kit

1

-

1

471

3-D Externals - PCI Bird Receiver

2301019-5

Option Kit

1

-

1

9-34

Section 9-13 - 3-D Externals

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-14 Back End Processor Assemblies 9-14-1

BEP 1

450 451 452

454

453

Figure 9-17 BEP 1 Table 9-20 Item 450

451

Back End Processor Assembly 1

Part Name Back End Processor (BEP1) Back End Processor (BEP1) w/ 3-D Option

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

2266548-3

BEP1 - P3 Processor

1

-

1

2266548-4

(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included See Table 9-19)

1

-

1

P3 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option

452

Back End Processor Power Supply

2348186-38

Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X

1

-

1

453

BEP Battery Assembly

2266548-5

Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy. Expected battery life is 1 year

1

-

2

-Same as Vivid 7 454

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 1

2366650

Will need to transfer mounting tray to new HDD

1

-

1

455

BIOS Blaster CD

2266548-27

BEP1 only

1

-

1

456

Battery, CMOS

2404028-7

Motherboard battery

1

-

1

BEP1 Repairable

2266548-13

BEP1

Chapter 9

-

9-35

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-14-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

BEP 2

460

460A

460B

460C

460D

463 461

469

464 465 462

466 466A

467

Figure 9-18 BEP 2 Table 9-21 Item 460 460

Back End Processor Assembly 2

Part Name Back End Processor (BEP2.0) Back End Processor (BEP 2.0) w/ 3-D Option

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

2348186-3

P4 Processor

1

-

1

1

-

1

2348186-4, -74

P4 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)

460

Back End Processor (BEP2.1)

2348186-43, -73

BEP2.1 with 2.3 Power Supply

1

-

1

460

Back End Processor (BEP2.1)

2348186-44, -74

BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with 2.3 Power Supply

1

-

1

9-36

Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-21

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Back End Processor Assembly 2 (Continued)

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

460A

Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)

2348186-67, -73

BEP2.0.1w/SB0220 Audio Card

1

-

1

460A

Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)

2348186-68, -74

BEB2.0.1 w/SB0220 Audio Card with FOB

1

-

1

460A

Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)

2348186-77, -73

BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card

1

-

1

460A

Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1)

2348186-78, -74

BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card w/ FOB

1

-

1

460B

Back End Processor (BEP2.1)

2348186-13

P4 Processor with Digital VIC Card

1

-

1

2348186-14

with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed

1

-

1

460C

Back End Processor (BEP 2.1) w/ 3-D Option

P4 Processor (Digital VIC Card) (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)

460C

Back End Processor (BEP2.1)

2348186-53, -73

BEP2.1 with New Sound Card

1

-

1

460C

Back End Processor (BEP2.1)

2348186-54

BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with New Sound Card

1

-

1

460C

Back End Processor (BEP2.1)

2348186-57

BEP2.1 w/o Base Image

1

-

1

460C

Back End Processor (BEP2.1)

2348186-58

BEP2.1 w/o Base Image w/ FOB

1

-

1

460D

Back End Processor (BEP2.2)

2348186-63, -73

1

-

1

460D

Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) w/ 3-D Option

2348186-64

1

-

1

460D

Back End Processor (BEP2.2)

2348186-73

BEP2.2 Sound Card Change

1

-

1

460D

Back End Processor (BEP 2.2)

2348186-74

BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” Sound Card Change

1

-

1

460D

Back End Processor (BEP2.2)

2348186-83

BEP2.2 PC2IP II Board

1

-

1

460D

Back End Processor (BEP 2.2)

2348186-84

BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” PC2IP II Board

1

-

1

461

Back End Processor Power Supply

2348186-38

Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X

1

-

1

462

BEP Battery Assembly

2266548-5

Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy. Expected battery life is 1 year

1

-

2

With Version 2.3 Power Supply Memory Upgrade to 768M With Version 2.3 Power Supply Memory Upgrade to 768M

-Same as Vivid 7 463

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 2.x

2348186-31

Comes with bracket or mounting tray

1

-

1

464

Patient I/O Module

2348186-22

BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

465

MOD Drive

2348186-23

BEP 2.0 Only - 1.3 Gigabyte IDE - 3.5 inch

1

-

1

466

CD-RW Drive

2348186-37

1

-

N

466A

CD-RW Drive

2348186-47

BEP 2.x Obsolete - Use 2404028

1

-

N

467

Fan

2348186-35

Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 2.x Only

1

-

1

468

BIOS Blaster CD

2348186-27

BEP2.x only

1

-

2

469

Battery, CMOS

2404028-7

Motherboard battery

1

-

1

BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 Obsolete - Use 2404028

Chapter 9

9-37

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-14-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

BEP 3.x / 4.x 482

475

480

475A 475B 481 481A

475C 476

477

478

478A

479

475D 475E 475F 475G

477A

BEP4.x

478B

485 486

484

Figure 9-19 BEP 3.x / 4.x 9-38

Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies

BEP3.x

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

9-14-3BEP 3.x / 4.x (cont’d) Table 9-22 Item 475

Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x

Part Name BEP3.0, Non-”Flock of Birds”

Part Number 2404027-3

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

Complete assembly

1

-

1

Complete assembly

1

-

1

(new PC2IPIIB)

(2404027-13)

475A

BEP3.0, with ”Flock of Birds” (new PC2IPIIB)

(2404027-14)

475B

BEP 3.5 Non-”Flock of Birds”

2404027-53

Complete assembly

1

-

1

475C

BEP 3.5 with ”Flock of Birds”

2404027-54

Complete assembly

1

-

1

475D

BEP 4.0 Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)

5162777-3

Complete assembly

1

-

1

475E

BEP 4.0 with ”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)

5162777-4

Complete assembly

1

-

1

475F

BEP 4.1 Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)

5162777-7

Complete assembly

1

-

1

475G

BEP 4.1 with ”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)

5162777-8

Complete assembly

1

-

1

476

BEP 3.x/ 4.x Power Supply

2404028-4

Also compatible for BEP 4.x

1

-

1

477

PCI DGVIC Assembly

5112272

BEP 3.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables

1

-

1

477A

PCI DGVIC2 Assembly

5301220-2

BEP 4.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables

1

-

1

PC2IPII card

FC200312

If unavailable, use FC200656

1

-

1

478A

PC2IPIIB card

FC200656

BEP 3.x

1

-

1

478B

PC2IP3 card

5197846

BEP 4.x only

1

-

1

478

2404027-4

479

Battery, BEP3.x / 4.x UPS

2404028-6

Set of 2 batteries Expected battery life is 1 year

1

-

1

480

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 3.x / 4.x

2404028-2

Comes with bracket or mounting tray, and adaptor

1

-

1

481

CD/DVD Drive

2404028

BEP 3 comes with bracket or mounting tray (LG GSA-4167B replaces the Sony CD-RW Drive) Includes Patch disk for R2.x and R3.x

1

-

1

481A

CD/DVD Drive

2404028-10

BT06 and later, BEP3.5 and later

1

-

1

482

Battery, CMOS

2404028-7

BEP3.x / BEP 4.x Motherboard battery

1

-

1

483

BEP3.x / 4.x Fan, Side Cover

2404028-5

Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 3.x / BEP 4.x

1

-

1

484

MO Drive (External - stand alone)

2404028-3

For use with BEP 3 - BEP 3 does not have MO Drive

1

-

1

485

Intake Filter

2404028-8

BEP3.x / BEP 4.x

1

Y

1

Chapter 9

9-39

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-22 Item

Part Name

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x (Continued) Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

2404028-9

BEP3.x / BEP 4.x

1

Y

1

486

Cover, FIlter

487

BIOS Blaster CD

5111457

For BEP 3 motherboard reset (obsolete - replaced with 5111457-3)

1

-

N

487A

BIOS Blaster CD

5111457-3

For BEP 3.x motherboard reset

1

-

1

487B

BIOS Blaster CD

5215511-1

For BEP 4.x motherboard reset

1

-

1

9-40

Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies

2348186-68 2348186-77 2348186-78

2348186-4 2348186-43 2348186-44

2266548-13

2266548-14

2266548-16

NA

NA

2358135-11

R4.1.3 (4)

Current (2) Base Image Load

NA

R3.0.12(3)

R3.1.1(3)

2358135-11

2371612-13

NA

NA

NA

2371612-13

NA

NA

NA

2371612-13

2348186-67

2348186-3

2266548-12

2371612-13

BEP2.0.1 (Prior to BT03)

BEP2.0

2266548-6

2371612-15

NA

2371612-15

2371612-15

NA

2348186-78

2348186-77

2348186-68

2348186-67

BEP2.0.1 (For BT03)

2371612-13

NA

NA

NA

2371612-13

2348186-58

2348186-57

2348186-54

2348186-53

2348186-14

2348186-13

BEP2.1

2371612-13

NA

NA

NA

2371612-13

2348186-74

2348186-73

2348186-64

2348186-63

BEP2.2 (Prior to BT03)

L9 BEP HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.x

2266548-10

R2.4.0 (1)

Application Software

2266548-4

2266548-3

2266548-2

2266548

BEP1

Table 9-23

2371612-15

NA

2371612-15

2371612-15

NA

2348186-84

2348186-83

2348186-74

2348186-73

2348186-64

2348186-63

BEP2.2 (For BT03)

2404024-7

2404024-7

NA

NA

NA

2348186-84

2348186-83

2348186-74

2348186-73

2348186-64

2348186-63

BEP2.2 (For BT04)

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Chapter 9

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-15 Software

9-41

9-42 NA NA

R7.0.5(6)

R9.0.x(7)

Section 9-15 - Software 5135124-3

NA NA

(6)

5135124-11

5135124-10

NA

NA

5135124-11

5135124-10

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

BEP 4.1

5135124-11

5135124-10

NA

NA

5135124-11

5135124-10

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

5162777-7 5162777-8

To confirm you have the most current application and baseload information, also see the latest revision of SN 70419 - LOGIQ 9 Application/Baseload Software Matrix - 5245411-100.

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

(1) Current R2.X Application Software = R2.4.0 (2322686-26). (2) Base Image Loads for Respective BEP are Backwards compatible. (3) Current R3.X Application Software = R3.0.11 (2322686-64); R3.0.12 (2322686-63); R3.1.0 Obsolete. See FMI 70200. See Note (3); R3.1.1 Optional FMI 70200. (4) Current R4.X Application Software = R4.1.3 (2322686-49). (5) Current R6.X Application Software = R6.0.4 (2322686-56), R6.0.5 (2322686-57) R6.0.6 (2322686-59) FMI 70197. (6) Current R7.X Application Software = R7.0.2 (2322686-62) , R7.0.4 (2322686-66), and R7.0.5 (2322686-67). (7) Current R9.X Application Software = R9.0.0 (2322686-70) Note: See FMI Closure Service Note 70443 for information on late request plan.

R9.x(7)

R7.0.5

5135124-1

NA 2404024-50 Rev 7

2404024-8

R6.0.6(5)

NA

5135124-3

5135124-1

5135124-1

5135124-1

2404024-50

2404024-50

2404024-50

2404024-8

NA

NA

R4.1.3(4)

Current (2) Base Image Load

NA

R6.0.5(5)

R7.0.4(6)

NA

R6.0.4(5)

NA

NA

R4.1.3(4)

R7.0.2(6)

2404024-8

R3.x.x(3)

NA

NA

R2.x.x(1)

R6.0.6(5)

NA

Application Software

BEP 4.0 5162777-3 5162777-4

Section 9-15

2404027-54

BEP 3.5 2404027-53

BEP 3

L9 BEP HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.x

2404027-3 2404027-4

Table 9-24

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H 1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Software (cont’d)

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-15

Software (cont’d)

Table 9-25 Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Software Tools

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

Database Defragmentation Toolkit

5184818

BT04 and later. Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use.

1

-

1

HDD Partition Wipe Tool Kit

5329420

1

-

1

See SN 70447 Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use. .

Chapter 9

9-43

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-16 Interconnect Cables 9-16-1

Peripheral Cables

504

TO CARD RACK

SONY VCR SVO-9500MD Remote

517B

Right

AUDIO OUT

Left Right

A9 A6 A7

517A

505

B/W Video In

RS-232C RS-232C

VIDEO OUT

A2 A15 A11 A10

AUDIO IN

Left

A8

SONY ANALOG B/W PRINTER UP890MD

503

516B

SONY ANALOG COLOR PRINTER UP-2900MD

Video Output

VIDEO IN

Speaker

A1

OP PANEL Audio Amp Mic Pre Amp

Video / Mic

A3 A14

502

AC Power

Op Control

MONITOR

A4 USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT

500

Video Rcvr

545

A5

BEP

TOUCH PANEL VIDEO

C22 B5

COLOR PRNT VIDEO

501

545

546 547

B6 Speaker B7

AC Power BEP

TOUCH PANEL VIDEO

C22

B3 B9

Op Control

MONITOR

B2

500A

Video Rcvr

MONITOR VIDEO

C13 or D4

USER INTERFACE BT04 SYSTEMS

548

B4

INTERNAL I/O BOARD

BT06 and later only Speaker and AC Power interrupted by Subwoofer electronics

Figure 9-20 Peripheral Cable Diagram

9-44

530 OP PANEL Audio Amp Mic Pre Amp

Video / Mic

B8

B1

USER INTERFACE

MONITOR VIDEO

C13 or D4 D5

TO INTERNAL I/O BOARD

530

RGB & Sync

516A

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-16-1

Peripheral Cables (cont’d) Table 9-26

Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Peripheral Cables

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

Top Console and Monitor to IIO, AC Ctrl, BEP and Gas spring

500

Console Flex Cable Assembly (complete)

FB200320*

*When replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems, also order 064G1768. Over-molded SVGA connector requires longer screws (064G1768) to attach to bulkhead.

500A

Extended-length Jack/Lock Screws

064G1768

Cable, Main harness w/ DVI

5119218

Longer screws required for modified connector (when replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems).

BT04 or later RGB & Sync From PCVIC to Color Printer - #1 -BEP-D5 to RGB Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -

501

Color Printer Video Cable

FB200789

#2 - Same as Vivid 7 -

502

Color Printer Control Cable

FB200790

Chapter 9

9-45

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-26 Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Peripheral Cables (Continued)

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

#3 - IIO-A1 to BW/Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -

503

BW/CP Printer Cable

FB200791

1

-

1

504

VCR Cable Harness

2371911

1

-

1

1

-

1

2

-

1

2

-

1

2

-

1

Combines FB200792 & FC200041 & FC200042 & FC200043 & FC200044 Same as Vivid 7 #4 - IIO-A2 to VCR - Same as Vivid 7 -

505

VCR Remote Control Cable

FB200792

#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR IN - Same as Vivid 7 516A

SVHS Cable, Shielded

FC200041

#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR Out- Same as Vivid 7 516B

SVHS Cable, Shielded

FC200042

#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR IN CH1(L)/CH2(R) - Same as Vivid 7 517A

9-46

Audio Cable, Shielded

FC200043

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-26 Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Peripheral Cables (Continued)

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

FC200044

2

-

1

2319024

1

-

1

#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR OutCH1(L)/CH2(R) - Same as Vivid 7 517B

530

Audio Cable, Shielded

Speaker Cable - Bulkhead

- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-

545

Monitor Cable Assembly

2304171

1

-

2

546

cable, internal microphone

5119245

1

-

1

547

adapter, DVI to SVGA w mic (CRT only)

5118498

1

-

1

1

-

1

Found Behind OPIO

548

adapter, SVGA to DVI (CRT only)

5119495 Found on Back of BEP

Chapter 9

9-47

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-16-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3 TO CARD RACK

SONY VCR SVO-9500MD Remote Right Left Right Left

A8 A9

SONY ANALOG B/W PRINTER UP890MD

AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN

B/W Video In

RS-232C

A6 A7

RS-232C

VIDEO OUT

A2 A15 A11

Video Output

VIDEO IN

S-Video In

75 ohm Off

A10

SONY ANALOG COLOR PRINTER UP-2900MD UP-51MD

If No VCR use A10

A1 A3 A14

549 549

A4

A5 INTERNAL I/O BOARD

Figure 9-21 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3

Table 9-27 Item 549

9-48

Part Name Cable, S-Video

Analog Color Printer W/BEP3 Part Number

Description

5113288

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-16-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables

BW PRINTER UP-D895

BEP

BW PRINTER SONY UP-D895

2353228

560

C21

COLOR PRINTER UP-D50

BEP

561

C20

A5 COLOR PRINTER SONY UP-D50

2354406

COLOR PRINTER UP-D21, 23, 55

BEP

562

C20

2353228

COLOR PRINTER SONY UP-D21, 23, 55

Figure 9-22 USB Printer Cables Table 9-28

USB Printer Cables

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

560

CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M

2353228

BEP C21 to BW Printer Sony UP-D895

1

-

1

561

USB TO SCSI ADAPTER

2354406

From C20 to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input

1

-

1

562

CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M

2353228

BEP C20 to Color Printer Sony UP-D21, UP-D23, UP-D55

1

-

1

Chapter 9

9-49

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-16-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Distribution Cables

551 To Color Printer To Wireless Mic To Color Printer

To VCR

550

To BW Printer BT04 or Systems with 4D

To Color Printer

Reserved for Wireless Mic AC DISTRIBUTION BOX

To VCR

540 To BW Printer

Thru BT03

AC CONTROL BOX P7 XFMR BOX

Part of Main Cable

To Op Panel

P5 P8

515 P6

AC Adapter P9

514 541 541A

513

542A 542M to P101

P10

To BEP

P11

To Card Rack

P100

INTERNAL I/O A14

507

Fan

507A A13

A16

A15

A12

Figure 9-23 AC Distribution Cable Diagram

9-50

#500

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

Serial Modem

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 9-16-4

Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Distribution Cables (cont’d) Table 9-29

AC Distribution Cables

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8 507

Fan Speed Control Cable

FB200795

#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8 507A

513

Fan Speed Control Cable if EQ4 PWA (2260210) is Rev K or earlier

2333827

AC-Distribution Cable Kit

FB200802

AC Mains 1 Cable

FB200803

Includes FB200802-1, FB200802-2, FB200802-3 & FB200802-4 #14 - ACT-M1 to ACP-F6 - Same as Vivid 7 -

514

#15 - ACT-M2 to ACP-F7 - Same as Vivid 7 515

AC Mains 2 Cable

FB200804

540

AC Peripheral Cable

070C5080

AC to Color & B/W Printers and VCR

3

-

1

541

AC Power Cord - USA

2162856

Obsolete - replaced by 2286301

1

Y

N

541A

AC Power Cord - USA

2286301

1

Y

1

1

Y

N

1

Y

1

1

Y

1

1

Y

1

If unavailable, order 5148381 Obsolete 542

AC Power Cord - Outside USA

2118615

542A

AC Power Cord - Outside USA

070C3194 Order only if a dedicated cord (5148381-x) for the specific country is unavailable. H4000ZA

542B

AC Power Cord - North America

5148381

H4000ZK

542C

AC Power Cord - Japan

5148381-2

Chapter 9

9-51

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-29 Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Distribution Cables (Continued)

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

Y

1

1

Y

1

1

Y

1

1

Y

1

5148381-8

1

Y

1

H4000ZB

542D

AC Power Cord - Europe

5148381-3

H4000ZD

542E

AC Power Cord - UK/Ireland

5148381-4

H4000ZC

542F

AC Power Cord - China

5148381-5

H4000ZL

542G

AC Power Cord - Switzerland

5148381-7

H4000ZE

542H

AC Power Cord - Denmark

542J

AC Power Cord - Israel

5322309

1

Y

1

542K

AC Power Cord - India

5323270

1

Y

1

542L

AC Power Cord - Argentina

5323275

1

Y

1

542M

AC Power Cord - Australia (Orange)

5323129

1

Y

1

9-52

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-29 Item

Part Name

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Distribution Cables (Continued) Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

550

Cable, 3 Head AC Power

FC200571

1

-

1

551

Cable, AC Power Split Y

5112631

1

-

1

Required If Using 3 Head AC Power Cable and Voice Command

Chapter 9

9-53

9-54 PCI SLOT 3

PC2IP

PC2IP

PCI SLOT 4

NON-PCI SLOT

SVGA IN

SCAN CONVERT

D5

RGB OUT

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

Figure 9-24 BEP 1.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram

BEP1.0

2266548-4 BEP 1.0 with 3D option

2266548-3 BEP 1.0 without 3D option

PCI SLOT 5

PARALLEL

COM2

COM1

USB2

USB1

10/100bT

OPTION C5 KEY

C7

C6

C3

C4

C17

50F

Cable # 500 TO LCD FLAT PANEL

Cable # 529

TO FRONT END CARD RACK SCB

Cable # 520

Cable # 531

Cable # 508

See # 536

Cable # 509

Cable # 518

Cable # 519

Cable # 508

C13

C18

C10 C11 C9

C16

C12

D3

B8

B7

B2

B1

B3

B4

B9

B5

B6

12C to RS232

VIDEO SWITCH

12C PORT

TRIGGER

COMP VIDEO

SVIDEO L

SVIDEO C

SVGA VIDEO

MIC EN

VCR AUDIO EN

MIC EN

TC ON SW1

Rack Power

SVIDEO L TO VCR

SVIDEO C TO VCR

SVIDEO L FROM VCR

SVIDEO C FROM VCR

SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT

SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT

COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT

SVIDEO L TO BW PRT

BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2

"Off Path"

"On Path"

TC ON SW1

TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE

INTERNAL I/O

VCR AUDIO EN

AUDIO TO OP PANEL

MIC FROM OP PANEL

PS_ON

12C

12C

RS232 #2

RS232 #1

USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL

A8 A9

A6 A7

12C

A10

A11

A1

A3

A2

A5

A4

SVIDEO TO VCR

PHONE

USB

REMOTE EXP 2

REMOTE EXP 1

Cable # 517B

Cable # 517A AUDIO FROM VCR

AUDIO TO VCR

FROM MODEM TO MODEM Cable # 506

12C PORT

FOOTSWITCH

SERIAL

10/100bT

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

TRIGGER

VIDEO OUT

BW VIDEO OUT

SVIDEO OUT

SVGA VIDEO OUT

EXTERNAL I/O

Cable # 516A

SVIDEO FROM VCR

TO PRINTERS

SPARE

TO VCR

Cable # 516B

Cable # 503

Cable # 502

Cable # 504

TO OP PANEL

Cable # 500

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

AGP VIDEO

AGP SLOT

PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES

PCI SLOT 1

SOUND CARD

AUDIO LINE IN (BLU) MIC IN (PINK) AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN)

PCI SLOT 2

Cable # 511 Cable # 500 TO IMAGE MONITOR

D1

Cable # 510

TO COLOR Cable # 501 PRINTER

D4

50F

SVGA OUT 1

OPTIONAL 3 D CARD PCI BIRD

RS232 (X4) I2C RS422 PSON POK

TO POWER SUPPLY

PC ON/OFF

PATIENT I/O

PS_ON 12C RS232(X3) SVGA OUT 2 S/C VIDEO OUT

PC POWER PC ON/OFF

D2

PC POWER FOR INTERNAL I/O CIRCUITS

9-16-4

68M

PC POWER

PC-VIC & PC2IO

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H 1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)

PCI SLOT 6

SVGA IN

SCAN CONVERT

Chapter 9

BEP2.0

2348186-4 BEP 2.0 with 3D option

USB6

USB5

USB4

USB3

PARALLEL PORT

COM1

USB2

USB1

10/100bT

AGP VIDEO

NOT USED

AGP SLOT

C10 C11

C18

C12

C16

C21

C20

C19

C18

Cable # 518

Cable # 519

Cable # 509

Cable # 529

Cable # 500 TO LCD FLAT PANEL

Cable # 520 TO FRONT END CARD RACK SCB

Cable # 531

Cable # 508

See # 536

NOT USED

NOT USED

NOT USED

Cable # 534

C5 OPTION KEY

C6

C3

C4

C17

C13

C9

50F

TO ANALOG Cable # 501 COLOR PRINTER

TO IMAGE MONITOR

Cable # 511 Cable # 500

D1

B7

B2

B1

B3

B8

B4

B9

B5

B6

12C to RS232

12C PORT

SVGA VIDEO

VIDEO SWITCH

TRIGGER

COMP VIDEO

SVIDEO L

SVIDEO C

MIC EN

VCR AUDIO EN

MIC EN

TC ON SW1

Rack Power

SVIDEO L TO VCR

SVIDEO C TO VCR

SVIDEO L FROM VCR

SVIDEO C FROM VCR

SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT

SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT

COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT

SVIDEO L TO BW PRT

BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2

"Off Path"

"On Path"

TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE

INTERNAL I/O

VCR AUDIO EN

AUDIO TO OP PANEL

MIC FROM OP PANEL

PS_ON

12C

12C

RS232 #2

RS232 #1

USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL

TC ON SW1

A8 A9

A6 A7

12C

A10

A11

A1

A3

A2

A5

A4

TO PRINTERS

SPARE

TO VCR

SVGA VIDEO OUT

PHONE

USB

REMOTE EXP 2

REMOTE EXP 1

FOOTSWITCH

SERIAL

10/100bT

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

TRIGGER

VIDEO OUT

BW VIDEO OUT

SVIDEO OUT

Cable # 517B

Cable # 517A AUDIO FROM VCR

AUDIO TO VCR

FROM MODEM TO MODEM Cable # 506

12C PORT

EXTERNAL I/O

SVIDEO TO VCR Cable # 516A

SVIDEO FROM VCR Cable # 516B

Cable # 503

Cable # 502

Cable # 504

TO OP PANEL

Cable # 500

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

2348186-3 BEP 2.0 without 3D option

SOUND CARD

AUDIO LINE IN (BLU) MIC IN (PINK) AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN)

PCI SLOT 1

Optional 3D Interface Card

PCI SLOT 2

PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES

PCI SLOT 3

PCI SLOT 4

PC2IP

PC2IP

PCI SLOT 5

D3

D5

RGB OUT

D2

D4

50F

SVGA OUT 1

PS_ON 12C RS232(X3) SVGA OUT 2 S/C VIDEO OUT

NOT USED

UPS Control to the BEP Power Supply

RS232 (X4) I2C RS422 PSON POK

PC ON/OFF

PATIENT I/O

PC POWER PC ON/OFF

Cable # 510

PC POWER FOR INTERNAL I/O CIRCUITS

9-16-4

68M

PC POWER

PC-VIC & PC2IO

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H 1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)

Figure 9-25 BEP 2.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram

9-55

PCI SLOT 6

DVI IN

DVI to Analog

RGB OUT

SVGA OUT 1

PS_ON 12C RS232(X3) SVGA OUT 2 S/C VIDEO OUT

PC POWER PC ON/OFF

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

AGP SLOT

Figure 9-26 BEP 2.1/2.2 and II/O Cabling Diagram

BEP2.1

2348186-14 BEP 2.1 with 3D option

2348186-13 BEP 2.1 without 3D option

USB6

USB5

USB4

USB3

PARALLEL PORT

COM1

USB2

USB1

10/100bT

D1

C10 C11

C18

C12

C21

C20

C19

C18

Cable # 509

Cable # 533 TO DIGITAL COLOR PRINTER TO DIGITAL B/W PRINTER Cable # 532

NOT USED

Cable # 534

Cable # 518

Cable # 519

Cable # 509

Cable # 500 TO IMAGE MONITOR

Cable # 529

Cable # 500 TO LCD FLAT PANEL

Cable # 520 TO FRONT END CARD RACK SCB

Cable # 531

Cable # 508A

See # 536

C5 OPTION KEY

C6

C3

C4

C17

C13

C30

C9

Cable # 511

50M

TO ANALOG Cable # 501 COLOR PRINTER

C16

D3

D5

D4 Not Used

D2

Cable # 510

B4

B9

B5

B6

B7

B2

B1

B3

B8

MIC TO BEP

12C to RS232

PORT

12C

SVGA VIDEO

VIDEO SWITCH

TRIGGER

COMP VIDEO

SVIDEO L

SVIDEO C

MIC EN

VCR AUDIO EN

MIC EN

TC ON SW1

Rack Power

SVIDEO L TO VCR

SVIDEO C TO VCR

SVIDEO L FROM VCR

SVIDEO C FROM VCR

SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT

SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT

COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT

SVIDEO L TO BW PRT

BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2

"Off Path"

"On Path"

TC ON SW1

TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE

INTERNAL I/O

VCR AUDIO EN

AUDIO TO OP PANEL

MIC FROM OP PANEL

PS_ON

12C

12C

RS232 #2

RS232 #1

USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL

PC POWER FOR INTERNAL I/O CIRCUITS

A8 A9

A6 A7

12C

A10

A11

A1

A3

A2

A5

A4

SPARE

TO VCR

Cable # 517B

AUDIO FROM VCR

AUDIO TO VCR

MODEM (option)

PHONE

USB

REMOTE EXP 2

REMOTE EXP 1

FOOTSWITCH

SERIAL

10/100bT

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

TRIGGER

VIDEO OUT

BW VIDEO OUT

SVIDEO OUT

SVGA VIDEO OUT

Cable # 517A

Cable # 506

w/ Modem

12C PORT

EXTERNAL I/O

SVIDEO TO VCR Cable # 516A

SVIDEO FROM VCR Cable # 516B

Not used with Digital Peripherals

Cable # 503 TO ANALOG PRINTERS

Cable # 502

Cable # 504

TO OP PANEL

Cable # 500

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

MOTHERBOARD AGP VIDEO -

ADD CARD - DIGITAL VIDEO OUT

SOUND CARD

AUDIO LINE IN (BLU) MIC IN (PINK) AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN)

PCI SLOT 1

Optional 3D Interface Card

PCI SLOT 2

PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES

PCI SLOT 3

PCI SLOT 4

PC2IP

PC2IP

PCI SLOT 5

NOT USED

UPS Control to the BEP Power Supply

RS232 (X4) I2C RS422 PSON POK

PC ON/OFF

PATIENT I/O

PC POWER

50M 68M

9-56 LINE IN TO BEP

9-16-4

LINE OUT FROM BEP

DG-VIC & DG2IO

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H 1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

BEP 3.x and BEP 4.x

ADVANCED (INPUT DEVICES)

See # 536

AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)

PCI DIGITAL VIDEO (LVDS BEP 4.1) or (DVI BEP 4.0)

9-16-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Figure 9-27 BEP 3.x/BEP 4.x and II/O Cabling Diagram Chapter 9

9-57

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 9-16-4

AC Distribution Cables (cont’d) Table 9-30

Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Internal I/O Cables

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

2

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

N

1

-

1

1

-

1

From Front Panel to Front End Processor - #5 Not used on BT04 505

Doppler Cable

FB200793

From Modem to External I/O - #6 Packaged with FB200802-1 (modem power cable) and used with Serial Modem Option kit 506

Standard Modem Cable

FB200794

BEP AGP Video to PCVIC Card SVGA - #8 - BEP-C13 to BEP-D3 - Same as Vivid 7 508

508A

Monitor Cable Standard

Digital Video Interface Cable

FB200796

2354056

Interface from AGP Slot ADD card to DGVIC BEP 2.1 & BEP3 #9 - IIO-B7 to BEP-C6 or IIO-B8 to BEP-C7 Used with 2364642 in BEP 2.x Systems

509

RS232 Com 1/2 Cable

FB200797

- Same as Vivid 7 -

#10 - IIO-B6 to BEP-D2 - Same as Vivid 7 510

Internal I/O-PC2IO Power/ Control Cable

FB200798

511

Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable

FB200799

511A

Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable

FC200286

#11 - Obsolete Use FC200286-

#11A BEP D1 to IIO B5 Same as Vivid 7 Improved flex and length

511B

Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to Male

FC200495 BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/ Internal I/O FC200503

9-58

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-30

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Internal I/O Cables (Continued)

Item

Part Name

511C

Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to Female

Part Number

Description

2404419

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

2

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/internal I/O FC200423 or FC200446 #18 - Same as Vivid 7 -

518

USB A-B Cable

070D2802

#19 - Same as Vivid 7 -

519

Ethernet Cat-5 Cable

070D2902

PCI Bus Extension Cable BEP to FEP - #20 - Same as Vivid 7 -

520

PCI Cable, AMP 974298

070M0016

#29 - IIO-B4 to BEP-AUD - Same as Vivid 7 529

Internal I/O-PC Audio Cable

FB200748

1

-

1

531

UPS Control Cable

FC200016

1

-

1

532

Digital B/W Printer Cable

1

-

1

1

-

1

From USB #6 to Digital B/W Printer - BEP 2.1 Straight USB, gray in color 2363062

533

Digital Color Printer Cable

From USB #5 to Digital Color Printer (USB to SCSI) BEP 2.1, Right angle USB, black in color

Chapter 9

9-59

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Table 9-30 Item

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Internal I/O Cables (Continued)

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

N

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

From USB #3 To Serial Cable To Internal I/O B7 Obsolete 534

USB to Serial Adapter Cable

2348186-26

Use 2364642 and FB200797

From USB #3 To Serial Cable FB200797 To Internal I/O B7 (Ext I/O Com Port) 534A

535

USB to Serial Adapter Cable

2364642

USB to SCSI Adapter

2354406

BEP 2.0 & 2.1 & BEP3

From USB to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input Parallel port hasp to BEP for Options

536

9-60

Option Key

2320432

Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-17 Power Distribution Modules 609

608 608A 604A 604 603 603A

601

602 Figure 9-28 Power Distribution Table 9-31 Item

Power Distribution

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

FRU

See Item 409

Power Supplies are mounted on the circuit board

1

1

601

Card Rack Power Supply PWA Assembly (FEPS)

602

AC Transformer Assembly

FB200581

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

2

603

AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V

FC200079

- Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515

1

N

603A

AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V

2399515

100-120 VAC Systems

1

1

604

AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V

FC200081

- Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515-2

1

N

604A

AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V

2399515-2

220-240 VAC Systems

1

1

608

FEP AC Line Filter & Cable

2315960

Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter and Power Harness Obsolete, use 2375555

1

N

FEP AC Line Filter

2375555

1

1

1

1

608A 609

ACC CLAMP

AC Controller Clamp

068E4000

- Same As Vivid 7-

Chapter 9

9-61

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-18 Air Distribution

652

652

653

651

Figure 9-29 Air Distribution Parts Table 9-32 Item

Part Name

Air Distribution Parts Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

651

Fan Assembly

FB200580

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

-

1

652

Air Intake Cover

FB307379

Replaced by FC307778

1

-

1

652

Air Intake Cover

FC307778

Replaces FB307379

1

-

1

653

Filter

FB307903

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

Y

1

9-62

Section 9-18 - Air Distribution

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-19 Voice Scan

760

750 756 757 764 765

770 766 765A

768

761

772

761A

762

763

769

773

767

767A

750A

755

Figure 9-30 Voice Scan Replacement Parts Chapter 9

9-63

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-19

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Voice Scan (cont’d)

Table 9-33

Voice Scan

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

750

Wireless Receiver

2383770

Obsolete - use 5115162 Must also order 5115164

1

Y

N

750A

Wireless Receiver

5115162

wireless receiver generation 2

1

-

1

755

Tray for Wireless Receiver

2377599

1

-

2

756

Foam - Wireless Receiver Bottom

2377600

1

-

2

757

Foam - Wireless Receiver Top

2377601

1

-

2

760

Battery Charger

2383775

1

Y

1

761

Battery - 9V NiMH

2383776

1

-

N

761A

Battery - 9V NiMH

5121291

Green 9V Rechargeable Battery

1

Y

1

762

Wireless Microphone

2383779

Over the ear style.

1

Y

1

763

Wired USB Headset

2386172

Obsolete - use 5159489

1

-

N

764

Wireless Microphone Care Kit

2386142

wind screens, clip, and cable only

1

-

1

765

Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless

2383773

Obsolete - use 5116453 Must also order 5115236

1

-

N

765A

Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless

5116453

wireless transmitter generation 2 (with charging contacts)

1

Y

1

766

Adapter Kit - 240Vac

2390117

1

-

1

767

AC power adapter, US

5116448

For 5116446 only

1

-

1

767A

AC power adapter, foreign

5116450

For 5116446 only

1

-

1

768

Rechargeable Battery Pack for Transmitter

5116454

1

Y

1

769

Battery recharger station

5116446

1

-

1

770

Antenna

5115891

For 2383770 and 2383773 only

1

-

N

772

Rechargeable AA Batteries

5115236

rechargeable AA batteries (pack of 4) for generation 2 transmitter

1

Y

1

773

Wired Headset

5159489

Andrea VS Headset

1

Y

1

9-64

Yellow 9V Rechargeable Battery Obsolete - use 5121291

For 2383775 only For 120V order 2383775

Section 9-19 - Voice Scan

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

9-19-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Voice Scan Cabling

WIRELESS MIC OPTION AC Distribution Box

2383769 or 5115164

2384314

NOTE: BT04 has AC Distribution Cable

2383767

AC Adapter

754

751 751B Wireless Mic

758 USB Audio Adapter

759

AF OUT

753

MIC IN

C19

AUDIO OUT

2384449

Receiver 2XXXXX

2383768

NOT USED

BEP 2383765

752

Figure 9-31 Wireless Interconnect Table 9-34

Wireless Interconnect

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

751

Battery Eliminator Cable

2383769

For use with 2383770

1

-

1

751B

Dummy AA Battery Power Supply

5115164

dummy AA battery power supply for wireless receiver generation 2

1

-

1

752

Audio to USB Adapter

2383765

1

-

1

753

Audio Cable from Receiver

2383768

1

-

1

754

Power Cable for Receiver

2383767

1

-

1

758

AC Adapter - 9V, 1.1A

2384314

1

-

1

759

USB Extension Cable

2384449

1

-

1

Chapter 9

9-65

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-20 4D Components 800 800A 805

803 804 802 801

Figure 9-32 4D Components Table 9-35

4 D Parts

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

800

4D Motor Controller

2372904

BT06 systems and prior

1

-

1

800A

4D Motor Controller

5180588

BT07 and later systems, or systems upgraded to BT07 or BT09, only

1

-

1

801

Cable, Bracket to Probe

2384183

1

Y

1

802

Cable, Motor Controller/Bracket assembly

2375551

1

-

1

803

Cable, Motor Controller to IIO

2375552

1

-

1

804

Cable, USB to Motor Controller

2353228

1

-

1

805

Cable, Motor Controller Power

2375553

1

-

1

9-66

Section 9-20 - 4D Components

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-21 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components

820

Figure 9-33 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components Table 9-36

Continuous Wave Doppler Components

Item

Part Name

Part Number

820

CW Card

2380188

CW Cable

2380188-13

Mu Metal Shield

2380188-11

Description

inserts under BEP for noise reduction

Chapter 9

Qty

CRU

FRU

1

-

1

1

-

1

1

-

1

9-67

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-22 Peripherals Table 9-37

Approved Peripherals

Part Name

Part Number

Description

Qty

CRU

FRU

Sony VCR 9500 M2D

2117635 (T3306ER)

H4700TC - NTSC Obsolete - order 5122171

1

-

N

H45001PA - PAL Version (Europe) Obsolete - order 5122172

1

-

N

Sony VCR 9500 MDP2 Sony 2900 Color Video Printer

2207254 (T3306PT)

H4700TD

1

-

2

Sony Color Printer UP51MDU

2281966

Analog (large footprint) H4700TH

1

-

2

Sony B/W Video Printer UP895MD

2288502

Analog E8210B

1

-

2

3 Position Footswitch

FB200723

- Same as Vivid 7 -

1

Y

2

Sony UP-D895MD

2358588

Digital B/W Printer Obsolete - order 5171608

1

-

2

Sony UP-D897MD

5171608

1

-

1

Sony UP-D50MD

2358596

Digital Color Printer Obsolete - crosses up to 5116559

1

-

1

Sony UP-D21MD

2358449

Digital Color Printer (small footprint) Obsolete - crosses up to 2401985

1

-

-

Sony UP-21MD

2351318

Analog Color Printer (small footprint)

1

-

-

Sony UP-D23MD

2401985

Digital, A6 (small footprint)

-

-

Sony UP-21 & D21 & UP-D23MD Adapter kit

2351082

Mounting plate, cover tray and screws

-

-

HP6122

2378741

Deskjet Printer

Y

-

Sony UP-D55MD

5116559

Digital, Replaces 2358596. If replacing 2358596, also order 5123707 Adapter Kit

-

-

HP-6540

5121837

1

-

-

HP-5650

5121839

1

-

-

UP-D55 Adapter Kit

5123707

-

-

Mitsubushi NTSC VCR

5122171

for USA NTSC with RS232C-USB

-

-

Mitsubushi PAL VCR

5122172

for Europe PAL with RS232C-USB

-

-

DVR Video Recorder

5120592

Panasonic LQ-MD800P DVR Video Recorder BT07 and later only

1

-

1

Cable, USB Right-Angle

5181607

USB A to B for DVR

1

-

1

Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer

KTZ2300182

Offline Report/Image Color Printer

1

-

1

Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer Cable

5315370

Cable for Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer

1

-

1

9-68

Replaces Sony UP-D895MD (2358588) Part includes drivers for earlier BTs

1

Includes: FC307635 plastic cover/tray, 46-312358P36 M4 screws and 068X0200 long strap

Section 9-22 - Peripherals

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-23 Customer Documentation Table 9-38

User Documentation

BT02 Part Number

BT03 Part Number

BT04 Part Number

BT06 Part Number

BT07 Part Number

BT09 Part Number

FRU

Basic User Manual (BUM)

2309819-100

2384455-100

5113776-100

5140804-100

5174158-100

5338262-100

N

ARM

2309835-100

2384454-100

5113777-100

5140805-100

5173359-100

5338271-100

N

QG

2309820-100

2384458-100

5113779-100

5140807-100

5173872-100

N/A

N

RN

2320595-100

2384452-100

5113780-100

5140811-100

5174065-100

5338272-100

N

eDocs

2384456-200

5113783-200

5140813-200

5173842-200

5338273-100

N

Kit

2392066

5113787-1

5140830-1

5173499-1

5338275-1

N

2384457-100

5113784-100

5140808-100

5173599-100

5173599-100

N

QC2

5113785-100

5140809-100

5173473-100

5173473-100

N

QC3

5113786-100

5140810-100

5174064-100

5174064-100

N

Description

QC1

2309821-100

AIUM

2163920-100

2163920-100

2163920-100

2163920-100

2163920-100

2163920-100

N

Install

22361715-100

22361715-100

22361715-100

22361715-100

22361715-100

22361715-100

N

UG

2388578-100

5113778-100

5140812-100

5174247-100

5338270-100

N

Add

2389047-100

5113781-100

N/A

N/A

N/A

N

OLH

2384453-100

5113782-300

5140806-100

5174102-100

5338264-100

N

2294853-100

2294853-100

2294853-100

2294853-100

2294853-100

N

2399069-100

2399069-100

2399069-100

Service Install Cklist

2294853-100

Chapter 9

N

9-69

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 9-24 Probes

901

907

902

912

911

910

909

908

906

905 924

904

903

914

913

921

917 916

915

923 918 920

919

Figure 9-34 LOGIQ™ 9 Probes 9-70

Section 9-24 - Probes

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-24

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Probes (cont’d)

Table 9-39

Available Probes

Item

Part Name

Part Number

Description

901

3.5C

2050357

902

M7C

903

CRU

FRU

H4901PE - PDI

Y

1

2294514

H40412LC

Y

1

E8C

2294641

H40412LE

Y

1

904

7L

2294521

H40412LF

Y

1

905

10L

2294523

H40412LG

Y

1

906

M12L

2294511

H40412LD

Y

1

907

i12L

2264883

H4012L

Y

1

908

4S

2295658

H4901PB - PDI

Y

1

909

10S

2298589

H4901PC - PDI

Y

1

910

8C

2348094

H40412LJ

Y

1

911

TCD 3S

2323337

H4701SZ - PDI

Y

1

912

3.5CS

2051858

H40412LK

Y

1

913

Probe Latching Mechanism

2363861

-

1

914

4C Probe

5123455

Kit includes Probe 2401359, ICD card and shipping carton

Y

1

915

4D3C-L Probe

KTZ195893 (KTI195894)

H44801G

Y

1

916

4D10L Probe

KTZ156836 (KTI156837)

H44801GB

Y

1

917

4DE7C Probe

KTZ195859 (KTI195860)

H44801GA

Y

1

918

CW 5 MHz Probe

2380188-5

Non-imaging Doppler Probe

Y

1

919

CW 8 MHz Probe

2380188-8

Non-imaging Doppler Probe

Y

1

4D8C

KTZ156959

H44801GZ

Y

1

920

t739L

2259246

H40212LM

Y

1

921

i739L

2259206

H40212LF

Y

1

923

4D16L

KTZ156972

H44801GY

Y

1

924

9L

5149427

H40412LT

Y

1

M7C Tru3D Sensor Bracket

2325300

-

-

M12L Tru3D Sensor Bracket

2325301

-

-

4S Tru3D Sensor Bracket

2325302

-

-

E8C Tru3D Sensor Bracket

2325303

-

-

10L Tru3D Sensor Bracket

2325304

-

-

Large round blue locking knob used on some probes L3, L5, L7, V3, V4, V7

Qty

H4904PC

Chapter 9

9-71

P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY A R TOYGE GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER9.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

Section 9-24

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Probes (cont’d)

Table 9-40

Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix

Item

Part Name

Part Number

2.x

3.x

4.x

6.x

7.x/9.x

901

3.5C

2050357

x

x

x

x

x

902

M7C

2294514

x

x

x

x

x

903

E8C

2294641

x

x

x

x

x

904

7L

2294521

x

x

x

x

x

905

10L

2294523

x

x

x

x

x

906

M12L

2294511

x

x

x

x

x

907

i12L

2264883

x

x

x

x

x

908

4S

2295658

x

x

x

x

x

909

10S

2298589

x

x

x

x

x

910

8C

2348094

NA

x

x

x

x

911

TCD 3S

2323337

NA

x

x

x

x

912

3.5CS

2051858

NA

x

x

x

x

914

4C Probe

5123455

NA

NA

x

x

x

915

4D3C-L Probe

KTZ195893 (KTI195894)

NA

NA

x

x

x

916

4D10L Probe

KTZ156836 (KTI156837)

NA

NA

x

x

x

917

4DE7C Probe

KTZ195859 (KTI195860)

NA

NA

x

x

x

918

CW 5 MHz Probe

2380188-5

NA

NA

x

x

x

919

CW 8 MHz Probe

2380188-8

NA

NA

x

x

x

4D8C

KTZ156959

NA

NA

NA

x

x

920

t739L

2259246

NA

NA

NA

x

x

921

i739L

2259206

NA

NA

NA

x

x

923

4D16L

KTZ156972

NA

NA

NA

x

x

924

9L

5149427

NA

NA

NA

x

x

9-72

Section 9-24 - Probes

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance Section 10-1 Overview 10-1-1

Periodic Maintenance Inspections It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ™ 9 system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

10-1-2

Purpose of Chapter 10 This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task. Table 10-1

Contents in Chapter 10

Section

Description

Page Number

10-1

Overview

10-1

10-2

Why do Maintenance

10-2

10-3

Maintenance Task Schedule

10-2

10-4

Tools Required

10-4

10-5

System Maintenance

10-5

10-6

Using a Phantom

10-10

10-7

Electrical Safety Tests

10-11

10-8

When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

10-27

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

10-28

Site Log

10-29

10-9

CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and

even when disconnecting/connecting cables.

DANGER

THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.

CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-1

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System

performance and cooling require this.

Section 10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2-1

Keeping Records It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on page 10-28) provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis. A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.

10-2-2

Quality Assurance In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee. Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken. Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site. Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.

Section 10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-3-1

How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ™ 9 should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.

NOTE:

It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ 9 care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance. Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ™ 9 ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service. The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ 9 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities.

NOTE:

10-2

If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies.

Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (cont’d) Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule Service at Indicated Time

Daily

Per Facilities Weekly Monthly QA Program

•* •

Clean Probes Clean Probe Holders

* or before each use

•

Clean Air Filter

Notes

more frequently depending on your environment

Clean Monitor and Touch Panel

• • • •

Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and Swivel Locks

•

Mobile Unit Check Daily

Check Control Panel Movement

•

Mobile Unit Check Daily

Inspect AC Mains Cable Inspect Cables and Connectors Clean Console

Mobile Unit Check Weekly

Console Leakage Current Checks

•

also after corrective maintenance

Peripheral Leakage Current Checks

•

also after corrective maintenance

Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks

•

also after corrective maintenance

Endocavity Probe Leakage

•

also after corrective maintenance

•

also after corrective maintenance

•

also after corrective maintenance

Measurement Accuracy Checks

•

also after corrective maintenance

Probe/Phantom Checks

•

also after corrective maintenance

Functional Checks

•

also after corrective maintenance

Current Checks Transesphongeal Probe Leakage Current Checks Surgical Probe Leakage Current Checks

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-3

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-4 Tools Required 10-4-1 10-4-1-1

Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance

Table 10-3

Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance Tool

Part Number

Comments

46–194427P231 46–194427P279

Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 V system

46–194427P369

3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap

46–194427P373

3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap

46–194427P370

3M #3051 conductive ground cord

46–194427P278

120V

46–194427P279

230V

Digital Volt Meter (DVM)

Anti Static Kit

Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner Air Filter

Section 9-18

Safety Analyzer

46–285652G1

SVHS VCR Cassette

air intake DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests

E7010GG

60 minute

E7010GF

120 minute

SVHS VCR Head Cleaner

See VCR user manual for requirements

DVD-R

See DVR user manual for requirements

DVD-RAM

3.5” MOD MEDIA

E8381AA

blank 128 M disk

E8381AB

blank 230 M disk

2117811

cleans the diskettes

5.25” MOD Media 3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 5.25” MOD Media Cleaner

cleans the diskettes

3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit

2148392

5.25” MOD Head Cleaner Kit

cleans the drive heads cleans the drive heads

QIQ Phantom

E8370RB

CD-RW Media

RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests. For LOGIQ™ 9

B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet

See printer user manual for requirements

Color Printer Cleaning Sheet

See printer user manual for requirements

Disposable Gloves Cut/Chemical Resistant Gloves Ergonomic kneel pad

10-4

5140706

Section 10-4 - Tools Required

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-5 System Maintenance 10-5-1

Preliminary Checks The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.

Table 10-4

System Checks

Step

Item

Description

1

Ask & Listen

2

Paperwork

Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see page 28). Note all probes and system options.

3

Power up

Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.

4

Probes

Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.

5

Displays

Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel.

6

Presets

Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW.

Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-5

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-5-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.

10-5-2-1

System Checks Table 10-5 Check

System Functional Checks Step

Description

B-Mode

Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.

CF-Mode

Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.

Doppler Modes

Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.

M-Mode *Applicable Software Options

Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast, Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation.

Xmit/Recv Elements

Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels are functional.

Keyboard Test Monitor

Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.

Touch Panel

Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.

Measurements

NOTE:

10-6

Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.

Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications. Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.

* Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.

Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-5-2-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Peripheral/Option Checks If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.

Table 10-6

10-5-3 10-5-3-1

GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks

Step

Item

Description

1

VCR

Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

2

DVR

Verify record/playback capabilities of the DVR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

3

B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

4

Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.

5

DICOM

6

InSite

7

Camera

8

Footswitch

9

ECG

Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device. Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications. (Warranty & Contract Customers only) Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary. Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary. Verify basic operation with customer

Input Power Mains Cable Inspection Table 10-7 Step 1

Mains Cable Inspection

Item

Description

Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.

2

Inspect

3

Verify

Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit.

4

Verify

Inlet connector retainer is functional.

Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-7

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-5-4 10-5-4-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Cleaning General Cleaning Table 10-8

General Cleaning

Step

Item

1

Console

2

Description Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.

Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Only use the following cleaners on the LOGIQ™ 9 Operator Panel: • Palmolive Dishwashing Liquid (manufactured by Colgate-Palmolive) • Sani Wipes (manufactured by Microgen Inc.)

3

Op Panel

• Tspray 2 (manufactured by Pharmaceutical Innovations, Inc.) DO NOT use original formula Tspray (Tspray 1) on the operator panel. Only Tspray 2 is acceptable. NOTE:Since various lotions can have a long term negative impact on the operator panel, hands should be clean and free of lotion. To clean the monitor face: • Use a soft, folded cloth. Gently wipe the monitor face.

4

CRT

• Do NOT use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with the filter (anti-glare shield). Hard rubbing will also damage the filter. • When cleaning the monitor, make sure not to scratch the monitor. Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol (ethanol, methanol, or isopropyl alcohol), abrasive cleaners, or other strong solvents, as these may cause damage to the cabinet or LCD panel.

5

DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as pencils or pens, as this may result in damage to the panel.

LCD

To clean LCD panel: • The LCD surface can be cleaned with a soft cloth, such as cotton or lens paper. • If necessary, stubborn stains can be removed by moistening part of a cloth with water to enhance its cleaning power.

10-5-4-2

Air Filter Cleaning Table 10-9

NOTE:

10-8

Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment

Step

Item

Description

1

Remove Filter Cover

2

Clean Filter

The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter is metal, wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic, vacuum or replace.

3

Install Filter

Install the clean filter.

Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions.

For your convenience or if the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. Refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number.

Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-5-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Physical Inspection Table 10-10 Physical Checks Step

Item

1

Labeling

2

10-5-6

Description Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 User Manual for details.

Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.

3

Control Panel

Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.

4

Control Panel Movement

Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that it latches in position as required.

5

Wheels & Brakes

Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation.

6

Cables & Connectors

Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Also check the wires connecting the side-fan on the BEP cover to the 4-PIN to make sure the wires are not pinched or damaged.

7

Shielding & Covers

Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.

8

External I/O

Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.

9

Op Panel Lights

10

Monitor Light

Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.

11

External Microphone

Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test.

Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.

Optional Diagnostic Checks Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.

10-5-6-1

View the Logs 1.) Review the system error log for any problems. 2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future. 3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-9

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-5-7 10-5-7-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Probe Maintenance Probe Related Checks Table 10-11 Probe Related Checks

10-5-7-2

Step

Item

1

Probe Holder

2

Probes

Description Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins

Basic Probe Care The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes. Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty. Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used. Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe. TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.

10-5-7-3

Basic Probe Cleaning Refer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning.

NOTE:

To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.

NOTE:

Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe.

NOTE:

Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.

Section 10-6 Using a Phantom See the Basic User Manual “Customer Maintenance” for information on using a phantom and quality assurance tests. NOTE:

10-10

The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.

Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-7-1

Safety Test Overview The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.

WARNING

THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.

CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical

equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.

CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components

that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.

Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current. To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should: •

Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way

•

Check probe leakage current: *

Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes

*

Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes

*

whenever probe damage is suspected

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-11

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-7-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9 The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA), IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, and IEC 62353 Medical Electrical Equipment — Recurrent test and test after repair of medical electrical equipment. Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table IV.

Table 10-12 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces Country

Normal Condition

Open Ground

Open Neutral

USA

0.1 mA

0.3 mA*

0.3 mA

Other

0.1 mA

0.5 mA

0.5 mA

Table 10-13 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes All Countries

Normal Condition

Open Ground

Open Neutral

AC

0.1 mA

0.5 mA

0.5 mA

DC**

0.01 mA

0.05 mA

0.05 mA

Table 10-14 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG Connections Country

Normal Condition

Open Ground

Open Neutral

USA

0.01 mA

0.05mA

0.05 mA

Other

0.01 mA

0.05 mA

0.05 mA

Table 10-15 ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) Limits***

NOTE:

Probe Type

Measurement

BF

5 mA

CF

0.05 mA

*Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table 19.5DV.1 **Most meters (like Dale 600/601) measure a composite of the AC and DC leakage current. ***ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) refer to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.

10-12

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-7-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.

Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester NOTE:

No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-13

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-7-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Grounding Continuity

CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test

Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1.

Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test 10-7-4-1

Meter Procedure Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance. 1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF. 2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit. 4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position. 5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position. 6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.

10-14

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-7-5 10-7-5-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Chassis Leakage Current Test Definition This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading. .

CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit

is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-15

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-5-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Generic Procedure The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.

Figure 10-3 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-12. 7.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-16. Table 10-16 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition TEST

CONDITION

1

Mounting screw for probe receptacle

2

caster support

3

Mounting screw for CRT housing

4

Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit

5

Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit

8.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data kept on site.

10-16

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-5-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-12. Record all data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.

Table 10-17 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current

Unit Power

Tester Polarity Switch

Tester Neutral Test 1 or Ground Probe Switch Connector

Test 2 caster

Test 3 CRT

Optional Test 4

Optional Test 5

Enter Name of tested peripheral here:

10-7-6 10-7-6-1

ON

NORM

OPEN

ON

NORM

CLOSED

ON

REV

OPEN

ON

REV

CLOSED

OFF

NORM

OPEN

OFF

NORM

CLOSED

OFF

REV

OPEN

OFF

REV

CLOSED

Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground Definition This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition.

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure

to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-17

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-6-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.

The connection is at service entrance or on the supply side of a separately derived system H (Black) POWER OUTLET

Appliance power switch (use both "off" and "on" positions) Polarity reversing switch (use both positions)

Patient lead selector switch (if any) (activated as required) Patient connected leads

Appliance

H N

N (White)

Internal circuitry

G

Between each patient lead and ground

G (Green) Insulating surface

Building ground Grounding contact switch (use in both "open" and "closed" positions)

Current meter H = Hot N = Neutral (grounded) G = Grounding conductor

Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads

Table 10-18 Testing Power Conditions

10-18

ECG Power

Meter’s Polarity Switch

Meter’s Neutral Switch

ON

NORM

CLOSED

ON

NORM

OPEN

ON

REVERSE

CLOSED

ON

REVERSE

OPEN

OFF

NORM

CLOSED

OFF

NORM

OPEN

OFF

REVERSE

CLOSED

OFF

REVERSE

OPEN

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-7-7

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured.

10-7-8

Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation.

CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock

hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed.

NOTE:

It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-19

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-8-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.

Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current Maximum Allowance Limit

Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test and Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test

AC Power Source

GROUND OPEN

GROUND CLOSED

115V

10uA

10uA

220/240V

500uA

10uA

Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current

Patient Lead Isolation Current Test

AC Power Source

Maximum Allowance Limit

115V

20uA

220/240V

5mA

Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current

10-20

ECG Power

Tester Polarity Switch

Tester Ground Switch

ON

NORM

CLOSED

ON

REVERSE

CLOSED

ON

NORM

OPEN

ON

REVERSE

OPEN

OFF

NORM

CLOSED

OFF

REVERSE

CLOSED

OFF

NORM

OPEN

OFF

REVERSE

OPEN

Tester Lead Selector RL

RA

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

LA

LL

C

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-7-9 10-7-9-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Probe Leakage Current Test Definition This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.

NOTE:

10-7-9-2

Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment. Test Equipment

Table 10-22 Test Equipment kits (Chapter 10 LOGIQ™ 9 Proprietary Service Manual) Kit

Description

Contents

46-285652G1

Dale 601 ULTRASOUND SAFETY ANALYZER FIELD KIT for 120V unit

• • • • • • •

ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601 for 120V unit Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE Vendor MODEL 600/102 6FT SALINE BATH GROUND CABLE Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER Vendor MODEL 600/600 SOFT CARRYING CASE Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL Vendor MODEL 600/901 LMINATED OPERATORS GUIDE

46-328406G2

Dale 601E ULTRASOUND SAFETY ANALYZER FIELD KIT for 220V unit

• • • • • • • •

ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601E for 220V unit Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE Vendor MODEL 600/101 16FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE Vendor MODEL 600/103 8FT CHASSIS GROUND PROBE Vendor MODEL 600/200 8FT EXTERNAL LEAKAGE GROUND CABLE #20 WIRE W/MINIGATOR CLIPS, 2 Ft CARRYING CASE and foam padding Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL

2113015

ULTRASOUND PROBE LEAKAGE ADAPTER KIT

• LOGIQ FAMILY PROBE ADAPTER • Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER • Vendor MODEL 600/203 RADIUS/SONOCHROME PROBE LEAKAGE CURRENT ADAPTER

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-21

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-9-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Test Equipment (cont’d) Table 10-23 Test Equipment and Accessory Description Dale Part number

Vendor MODEL 600/100 46-285647P2

Accessory Name

Picture

Description

Used on DALE601/601E to measure earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used as reference lead for external measurement.

CHASSIS CABLE

Black coil cord with extended length and black grips.

Vendor MODEL 600/102 46-285647P4

Vendor MODEL 600/200

Also referred to as “Saline Probe” or “Saline Bath Ground Cable”. Measures earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used for grounding saline baths for isolation testing of probes.

CHASSIS GROUND PROBE

Used on DALE601/601E. This probe may be substituted for the 600/100 Chassis Cable, and used as a probe Black coil cord with needle probe instead of a clamp. for testing receptacles and for tight spaces. Standard auxiliary cable for external measurements of leakage current and voltage gradient between two surfaces. Used on DALE601/601E to measure:

ISO/EXTERNAL LEAKAGE CABLE

• Point-to-Point Leakage Current • Probe and Transducer Isolation Current

46-285647P6

May only be connected to the female connector of the Analyzer, labeled Black coiled cord with red grips. EXTERNAL

Vendor MODEL 600/202

ULTRASOUND LOGIQ FAMILY ADAPTER

2107545-2

10-22

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

Use during M.A.P. or Isolation test (see Chapter 10 - Meter procedure using probe adapter)

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-9-3

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Generic procedure on Leakage Current Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line mains polarity normal, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.

SALINE

Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current 10-7-9-4

Meter procedure using probe adapter The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly. Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current: 1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF. 2.) Plug the unit’s mains power cord into the test meter, and plug the test meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's “CHASSIS” connector. 4.) Set the test meter's “FUNCTION” switch to “CHASSIS” (Dale 600) or "ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE" (Dale 601). 5.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ™ 9 unit. 6.) Put the saline probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath.

CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid

beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the LIFT GROUND switch is depressed.

7.) Power ON the LOGIQ™ 9 unit. 8.) After the LOGIQ™ 9 unit has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested so it is the active probe. 9.) Depress the LIFT GROUND rocker switch and record the highest current reading. 10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-24 for every probe. The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-13 and Table 10-14. 11.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data using Table 10-24.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-23

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-9-4

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Meter procedure using probe adapter (cont’d)

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the

Ultrasound unit is powered on.

Power off

P

Power off the Ultrasound unit, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch on the leakage meter to avoid possible power supply damage.

Table 10-24 Typical Data Sheet For Probe Source Leakage Current Probe Tested: Unit Power

Tester Power Polarity Switch

Tester NEUTRAL Switch

Tester GROUND Switch

Measurement

Start with System Powered OFF OFF

NORMAL

OPEN

CLOSED

OFF

NORMAL

OPEN

OPEN

OFF

NORMAL

CLOSED

CLOSED

OFF

NORMAL

CLOSED

OPEN

Open Neutral first, then attempt Power ON ON

NORMAL

OPEN

CLOSED

ON

NORMAL

OPEN

OPEN

Close Neutral. Power System ON, and wait until Probe under test is active, before continuing

10-24

ON

NORMAL

CLOSED

CLOSED

ON

NORMAL

CLOSED

OPEN

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 10-7-9-5

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current The Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins. The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly. Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current. 1.) Plug the test meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 2.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe in diagram) into the test meter's “CHASSIS” connector. 3.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter. 4.) Plug the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter into the test meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”.

Figure 10-6 Probe Isolation (Sink) Current Test

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-25

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

10-7-9-5Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current (cont’d) 5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL (DALE 600) or Mains on Applied Parts (M.A.P.) (DALE 601) position. 6.) Put the Chassis Ground Probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath. CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid

beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the ISO Test/MAP switch is depressed.

7.) Depress the ISO TEST (DALE 600) or M.A.P. (DALE 601) ROCKER SWITCH and record the highest current reading. 8.) Test every probe and record in Table 10-25 the test results for every probe. The test passes when all readings measure less than the values in Table 10-15. 9.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data. .

Table 10-25 Probes Tested for Isolation (Sink) Current Probe Tested

10-26

Measurement with ISO/Mains Applied

Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... CHASSIS FAILS Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part. Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead. NOTE:

No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

PROBE FAILS Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner. NOTE:

Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list. If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity. If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.

PERIPHERAL FAILS Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.

STILL FAILS If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.

NEW UNIT If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.

ECG FAILS Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

10-27

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

10-8-1

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

ELECTRICAL SAFETY Electrical Test Performed

Max Value Allowed

Value Measured

OK?

Comments

OK?

Comments

Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.) System Ground Continuity Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Ground) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Lead) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Isolation) Peripheral 1 Leakage Current Peripheral 1Ground Continuity Peripheral 2 Leakage Current Peripheral 2Ground Continuity Peripheral 3 Leakage Current Peripheral 3Ground Continuity

PROBES Probe Number (from previous page)

Max Value Allowed

Max Value Measured

Probe 1: Probe 2: Probe 3: Probe 4: Probe 5: Probe 6: Probe 7: Probe 8: Probe 9:

Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected. Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________ 10-28

Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Section 10-9 Site Log

Table 10-26 Site Log Date

Service person

Problem

Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance

Comments

10-29

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 CHAPTER10.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Table 10-26 Site Log (Continued) Date

10-30

Service person

Problem

Section 10-9 - Site Log

Comments

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_IX.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

INDEX Numerics 3-D Externals, 9-34

A AC Power PWB, 5-72 Acoustic Noise Output, 3-11 Acquisition Diagnostics, 7-19 Adjustment Z-Release Cable, 6-8 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card, 5-35, 5-40 Air Flow Control, 5-79 Air Flow Distribution, 5-79 Application Software Upgrading, 8-49, 8-61 Application Software Load, 8-44 Automatic Troubleshooting, 7-19

B B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board, 5-18 B/M-Mode Checks Functional Checks, 4-14 Back End Processor, 5-22, , 5-27, 5-34, 5-39 BEP3, 5-34, , 5-39 Inputs, 5-25 Outputs, 5-26 Theory, 5-22, 5-27, 5-34, 5-39 Backup Media, 8-18 Patient Database, 4-22 Preset Configurations, 4-22 Basic Measurements Functional Checks, 4-16 Battery, 8-12, , 8-16 BEP, 8-7, 8-10, 8-13 Battery Pack Replacement, 8-4 Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41 Power Off Path, 5-45 Power On, 5-44 Power On Path, 5-44 BEP3 Inputs, 5-37, 5-42 Outputs, 5-38, 5-43 Block Diagram Simple System, 5-5 BMP Board General Description, 5-18 Boot Up, 3-8, 4-6

Brake Adjustment, 6-15 Brake Arm Adjustment, 6-13 Brake Pedal warning, 3-2 Brakes Functional Checks, 4-28

C Calibration Utilities, 7-23 CD-ROM Handling Tips, 8-18 Media Requirements, 8-18 CE Compliance, 1-22 CFM and PWD Modes Functional Checks, 4-15 Common Diagnostics, 7-30 Configuration, 5-88 Connecting USB Line Printer, 3-24 Connectivity Settings, 8-17 Worksheet, 3-22 Console Lock Assembly Replacement, 8-70 Console Weight, 3-11 Contact Information, 1-23 Control Panel, 4-3 Customer Assistance, 1-23

D Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-18 Diagnostics, 5-86, , 7-18 Acquisition, 7-19 Common, 7-30 Direction Lock Functional Checks, 4-28 Disposal, 8-12, 8-16 DVD Media Requirements, 8-18

E EBM Board, 5-19 Electrical requirements, 2-2 Safety, 1-17 Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-22 EMI Protection, 3-7 Index

Index - I

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_IX.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

I

EQ Board Basic Functions, 5-17 General Description, 5-16 Equalization (EQ) Board, 5-16 Ethernet Signal, 5-67 External I/O, 5-65 Bi-directional Signals, 5-66 Input Signals, 5-65 Location in the Unit, 5-65 Output Signals, 5-67 EZBackup/Move, 8-18, 8-19

I/O Ports, 3-17 Image Management Functional Checks, 4-13 Guide, 8-18 Inrush Current, 2-2 Installation average time, 3-2 Internal I/O, 5-55 Connections, 5-57 connections, 5-57 Fuses, 5-58 Inputs, 5-59 Jumpers and Dip-switches, 5-58 LEDs, 5-58 Location in the Unit, 5-58 Outputs, 5-61 Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41

F Facility Features desired, 2-7 required, 2-7 Frog Leg Angle Adjustment, 8-92 Front End Processor Power Supply Board, 5-8 Simple Theory, 5-7 Front End Subsystem, 5-9 Functional Checks, 4-1 B/M-Mode Checks, 4-14 Basic Measurements, 4-16 Brakes, 4-25, 4-28 CFM and PWD Modes, 4-15 Control Panel, 4-3 Image Management, 4-13 Locks, 4-28 Mechanical, 4-25 Monitor Display, 4-5 Peripherals, 4-24 Probes/Connector Usage, 4-11 Required Equipment, 4-1 Touch Panel, 4-4

L Label Locations, 1-18 LEDs SCB, 5-14 Line Printer Connecting, 3-24 Loading Software Application, 8-44 Base Image, 8-26 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface, 5-80 Logs, 5-83

M Managing Patient Data and Presets, 8-18 Mechanical Checks Operator I/O, 4-25 Mechanical Descriptions, 5-76 Monitor, 5-76 Top Console Positioning, 5-76 Mechanical Safety, 1-16 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter, 10-23 Models Covered, 1-3, 9-2

G Gas Shock Replacement, 8-74 Gas Spring Adjustment, 6-8 Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3 General Cleaning, 10-8 Global Service User Interface, 5-80 Error Logs Page, 5-82 Service Home Page, 5-81 Global Service User Interface (GSUI), 5-80

H Hazard Icons, 1-10 Human Safety, 1-16 Index - II

-

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_IX.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 Modem, 5-69 Inputs/Outputs, 5-69 LEDs, 5-70 Location in the Unit, 5-69 Monitor, 5-64 Counter-balance Adjustment, 6-4 Tilt, 6-4 Tilt Adjustment, 6-4 Monitor Display Functional Checks, 4-5

O Operator I/O Emergency Release Procedure, 6-12 Operator Panel position warning, 3-2

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL Probes/Connector Usage Functional Checks, 4-11 Product Icons, 1-11 PS Battery Operation, 5-35, 5-40

R Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment, 6-16 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4 Regulatory, 6-1 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure, 8-70, , 8-72 RF Amplifier Board Theory, 5-10

S P P4 Key Function, 7-13 Patient I/O, 5-54 PC Diagnostics, 7-31 (Interactive Tests), 7-32 PCI Cards, 5-35, , 5-40 PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards, 5-35, 5-40 PCVIC Card, 5-23, 5-28 Peripherals, 5-68 Functional Checks, 4-24 Physical Dimensions, 3-11 PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE, 10-28 Power Distribution, 5-71 Basic Overall AC, 5-71 Power Off, 3-9 Procedure, 4-9 Power On, 3-8, 4-6 Power Requirements, 2-2 electrical, 2-2 stability, 2-3 Power Stability Requirements, 2-3 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure BEP 2, 8-7 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure BEP 3, 8-10, 8-13 Power-up Procedures Voltage Settings, 3-6 Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-6 Preset Data, 8-18 Probe Leakage Current Test, 10-21 Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-10 Probe Leakage Current Test, 10-21 Probes, 3-21

Safety reminders, 3-3 Safety Considerations, 1-16 Scan Control Board High Level Features, 5-14 Scan Control Board (SCB), 5-13 SCB LED, 5-14 Screen Captures, 7-13 Service Adjustments, 6-1 Service Home Page, 5-81 Service Login, 5-80 Service Manual Purpose of, 1-1 Service Platform, 5-79 Shut Down Procedure, 4-9 Shutdown, 3-9 Software Application Load, 8-44 Base Image Load, 8-26 System Features, 4-3 System Maintenance, 10-5 System Manufacturer, 1-24 System Setup, 8-65

T Theory Front End SubSystem, 5-9 General, 5-2 RF Amplifier Board, 5-10 XDIF Board, 5-9 Time Delay (TD) Boards, 5-12 Top Console, 5-63 See Operator I/O, 5-63 Top Plane Board, 5-9 Index - III

P R E L I M I N A R Y GE H

1/18/10 L9_IX.FM

EALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14

LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Touch Panel Functional Checks, 4-3, 4-4 Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4 Troubleshooting Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3 Screen Captures, 7-13 Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4 Vital System Information, 7-3

U Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4 Upgrading Application Software, 8-49, 8-61 USB Adapter Setup, 5-32 User-Defined Backup Protocols, 8-22 Utilities, 5-89

V Video Specifications, 3-20 Voltage Settings, 3-6

W Warnings and Cautions, 1-16

X XDIF Board Theory, 5-9

Z Z-Release Cable Adjustment, 6-8

Index - IV

-

© 2002-2010, General Electric Company. GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC. 9900 Innovation Drive Wauwatosa, Wisconsin 53226 USA

www.gehealthcare.com